u blox 1EHQ24NN UMTS/LTE Voice and Data Module User Manual TOBY L2 series

u-blox AG UMTS/LTE Voice and Data Module TOBY L2 series

Contents

Users manual

Download: u blox 1EHQ24NN UMTS/LTE Voice and Data Module User Manual TOBY L2 series
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]u blox 1EHQ24NN UMTS/LTE Voice and Data Module User Manual TOBY L2 series
Document ID3139729
Application IDtaoJGHuGKh/QeHrHQUtvZw==
Document DescriptionUsers manual
Short Term ConfidentialNo
Permanent ConfidentialNo
SupercedeNo
Document TypeUser Manual
Display FormatAdobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize386.16kB (4826980 bits)
Date Submitted2016-09-20 00:00:00
Date Available2017-03-19 00:00:00
Creation Date2016-09-06 08:30:54
Producing SoftwareMicrosoft® Office Word 2007
Document Lastmod2016-09-06 08:30:54
Document TitleTOBY-L2 series
Document CreatorMicrosoft® Office Word 2007
Document Author: u-blox AG

TOBY-R2 series
LTE Cat 1 / HSPA / EGPRS modules
System Integration Manual
Abstract
This document describes the features and the system integration of
TOBY-R2 series multi-mode cellular modules.
These modules are a complete, cost efficient and performance
optimized LTE Cat 1 / 3G / 2G multi-mode solution covering up to five
LTE bands, up to four 3G UMTS/HSPA bands and up to four 2G
GSM/EGPRS bands in the compact TOBY LGA form factor.
www.u-blox.com
UBX-16010572 - R01
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Document Information
Title
TOBY-R2 series
Subtitle
LTE Cat 1 / HSPA / EGPRS modules
Document type
System Integration Manual
Document number
UBX-16010572
Revision and date
R01
Document status
Objective Specification
08-Jul-2016
Document status explanation
Objective Specification
Document contains target values. Revised and supplementary data will be published later.
Advance Information
Document contains data based on early testing. Revised and supplementary data will be published later.
Early Production Information
Document contains data from product verification. Revised and supplementary data may be published later.
Production Information
Document contains the final product specification.
This document applies to the following products:
Name
Type number
Modem version
Application version
PCN / IN
TOBY-R200
TOBY-R201
TOBY-R200-02B-00
TOBY-R201-02B-00
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TOBY-R202
TOBY-R202-02B-00
30.01
A01.00
UBX-16016282
u-blox reserves all rights to this document and the information contained herein. Products, names, logos and designs described herein may in
whole or in part be subject to intellectual property rights. Reproduction, use, modification or disclosure to third parties of this document or
any part thereof without the express permission of u-blox is strictly prohibited.
The information contained herein is provided “as is” and u-blox assumes no liability for the use of the information. No warranty, either
express or implied, is given, including but not limited, with respect to the accuracy, correctness, reliability and fitness for a particular purpose
of the information. This document may be revised by u-blox at any time. For most recent documents, please visit www.u-blox.com.
Copyright © 2016, u-blox AG
u-blox® is a registered trademark of u-blox Holding AG in the EU and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All other registered trademarks or
trademarks mentioned in this document are property of their respective owners.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Page 2 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Preface
u-blox Technical Documentation
As part of our commitment to customer support, u-blox maintains an extensive volume of technical
documentation for our products. In addition to our product-specific technical data sheets, the following manuals
are available to assist u-blox customers in product design and development.

AT Commands Manual: This document provides the description of the AT commands supported by the
u-blox cellular modules.

System Integration Manual: This document provides the description of u-blox cellular modules’ system
from the hardware and the software point of view, it provides hardware design guidelines for the optimal
integration of the cellular modules in the application device and it provides information on how to set up
production and final product tests on application devices integrating the cellular modules.

Application Note: These documents provide guidelines and information on specific hardware and/or
software topics on u-blox cellular modules. See Related documents for a list of Application Notes related to
your Cellular Module.
How to use this Manual
The TOBY-R2 series System Integration Manual provides the necessary information to successfully design and
configure the u-blox cellular modules.
This manual has a modular structure. It is not necessary to read it from the beginning to the end.
The following symbols are used to highlight important information within the manual:
An index finger points out key information pertaining to module integration and performance.
A warning symbol indicates actions that could negatively impact or damage the module.
Questions
If you have any questions about u-blox Cellular Integration:

Read this manual carefully.

Contact our information service on the homepage http://www.u-blox.com/
Technical Support
Worldwide Web
Our website (http://www.u-blox.com/) is a rich pool of information. Product information, technical documents
can be accessed 24h a day.
By E-mail
Contact the closest Technical Support office by email. Use our service pool email addresses rather than any
personal email address of our staff. This makes sure that your request is processed as soon as possible. You will
find the contact details at the end of the document.
Helpful Information when Contacting Technical Support
When contacting Technical Support, have the following information ready:

Module type (TOBY-R202) and firmware version

Module configuration

Clear description of your question or the problem

A short description of the application

Your complete contact details
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Preface
Page 3 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................ 3
Contents.............................................................................................................................. 4
System description ....................................................................................................... 8
1.1
1.2
Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 8
Architecture ........................................................................................................................................ 10
1.3
Pin-out ............................................................................................................................................... 12
1.4
1.5
Operating modes ................................................................................................................................ 16
Supply interfaces ................................................................................................................................ 18
1.5.1
Module supply input (VCC) ......................................................................................................... 18
1.5.2
1.5.3
RTC supply input/output (V_BCKP) .............................................................................................. 26
Generic digital interfaces supply output (V_INT) ........................................................................... 27
1.6
System function interfaces .................................................................................................................. 28
1.6.1
1.6.2
Module power-on ....................................................................................................................... 28
Module power-off ....................................................................................................................... 30
1.6.3
Module reset ............................................................................................................................... 32
1.6.4
Module / host configuration selection ......................................................................................... 32
1.7
Antenna interface ............................................................................................................................... 33
1.7.1
Antenna RF interfaces (ANT1 / ANT2) .......................................................................................... 33
1.7.2
Antenna detection interface (ANT_DET) ...................................................................................... 35
1.8
SIM interface ...................................................................................................................................... 35
1.8.1
SIM interface ............................................................................................................................... 35
1.8.2
SIM detection interface ............................................................................................................... 35
1.9
Data communication interfaces .......................................................................................................... 36
1.9.1
UART interface ............................................................................................................................ 36
1.9.2
1.9.3
USB interface............................................................................................................................... 47
DDC (I C) interface ...................................................................................................................... 50
1.9.4
SDIO interface ............................................................................................................................. 51
1.10
Audio .............................................................................................................................................. 52
1.10.1 Digital audio over I S interface ..................................................................................................... 52
1.11
General Purpose Input/Output ........................................................................................................ 53
1.12
1.13
Reserved pins (RSVD) ...................................................................................................................... 53
System features............................................................................................................................... 54
1.13.1
Network indication ...................................................................................................................... 54
1.13.2
1.13.3
Antenna supervisor ..................................................................................................................... 54
Jamming detection ...................................................................................................................... 54
1.13.4
Dual stack IPv4/IPv6 ..................................................................................................................... 55
1.13.5
1.13.6
TCP/IP and UDP/IP ....................................................................................................................... 55
FTP .............................................................................................................................................. 55
1.13.7
HTTP ........................................................................................................................................... 55
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Contents
Page 4 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.13.8
1.13.9
SSL / TLS ...................................................................................................................................... 56
Bearer Independent Protocol ....................................................................................................... 57
1.13.10
AssistNow clients and GNSS integration ................................................................................... 57
1.13.11
1.13.12
Hybrid positioning and CellLocate .......................................................................................... 58
Wi-Fi integration ...................................................................................................................... 60
1.13.13
Firmware update Over AT (FOAT)............................................................................................. 60
1.13.14
1.13.15
Firmware update Over The Air (FOTA) ...................................................................................... 60
Smart temperature management ............................................................................................. 61
1.13.16
Power saving ........................................................................................................................... 63
®
Design-in ..................................................................................................................... 64
2.1
Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 64
2.2
Supply interfaces ................................................................................................................................ 65
2.2.1
2.2.2
Module supply (VCC) .................................................................................................................. 65
RTC supply output (V_BCKP) ....................................................................................................... 79
2.2.3
Generic digital interfaces supply output (V_INT) ........................................................................... 81
2.3
System functions interfaces ................................................................................................................ 82
2.3.1
Module power-on (PWR_ON) ...................................................................................................... 82
2.3.2
Module reset (RESET_N) .............................................................................................................. 83
2.3.3
Module / host configuration selection ......................................................................................... 84
2.4
Antenna interface ............................................................................................................................... 85
2.4.1
Antenna RF interfaces (ANT1 / ANT2) .......................................................................................... 85
2.4.2
Antenna detection interface (ANT_DET) ...................................................................................... 92
2.5
SIM interface ...................................................................................................................................... 94
2.5.1
Guidelines for SIM circuit design.................................................................................................. 94
2.5.2
Guidelines for SIM layout design ................................................................................................. 99
2.6
Data communication interfaces ........................................................................................................ 100
2.6.1
UART interface .......................................................................................................................... 100
2.6.2
2.6.3
USB interface............................................................................................................................. 105
DDC (I C) interface .................................................................................................................... 107
2.6.4
SDIO interface ........................................................................................................................... 111
2.7
Audio interface ................................................................................................................................. 112
2.7.1
Digital audio interface ............................................................................................................... 112
2.8
General Purpose Input/Output .......................................................................................................... 116
2.9
2.10
Reserved pins (RSVD) ........................................................................................................................ 117
Module placement ........................................................................................................................ 117
2.11
Module footprint and paste mask ................................................................................................. 118
2.12
2.13
Thermal guidelines ........................................................................................................................ 119
ESD guidelines .............................................................................................................................. 120
2.13.1
ESD immunity test overview ...................................................................................................... 120
2.14
Schematic for TOBY-R2 series module integration ......................................................................... 121
2.14.1 Schematic for TOBY-R2 series module “02” product version ..................................................... 121
2.15
2.15.1
Design-in checklist ........................................................................................................................ 122
Schematic checklist ................................................................................................................... 122
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Contents
Page 5 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.15.2
2.15.3
Layout checklist ......................................................................................................................... 123
Antenna checklist ...................................................................................................................... 123
Handling and soldering ........................................................................................... 124
3.1
3.2
Packaging, shipping, storage and moisture preconditioning ............................................................. 124
Handling ........................................................................................................................................... 124
3.3
Soldering .......................................................................................................................................... 125
3.3.1
3.3.2
Soldering paste.......................................................................................................................... 125
Reflow soldering ....................................................................................................................... 125
3.3.3
Optical inspection ...................................................................................................................... 126
3.3.4
3.3.5
Cleaning.................................................................................................................................... 126
Repeated reflow soldering ......................................................................................................... 127
3.3.6
Wave soldering.......................................................................................................................... 127
3.3.7
3.3.8
Hand soldering .......................................................................................................................... 127
Rework...................................................................................................................................... 127
3.3.9
Conformal coating .................................................................................................................... 127
3.3.10
3.3.11
Casting...................................................................................................................................... 127
Grounding metal covers ............................................................................................................ 127
3.3.12
Use of ultrasonic processes ........................................................................................................ 127
Approvals.................................................................................................................. 128
4.1
Product certification approval overview ............................................................................................. 128
4.2
US Federal Communications Commission notice ............................................................................... 129
4.2.1
Safety warnings review the structure ......................................................................................... 129
4.2.2
Declaration of Conformity ......................................................................................................... 129
4.2.3
Modifications ............................................................................................................................ 129
4.3
Industry Canada notice ..................................................................................................................... 130
4.3.1
Declaration of Conformity ......................................................................................................... 130
4.3.2
Modifications ............................................................................................................................ 131
4.4
R&TTED / RED and European Conformance CE mark ........................................................................ 133
Product testing ......................................................................................................... 134
5.1
5.2
u-blox in-series production test ......................................................................................................... 134
Test parameters for OEM manufacturer ............................................................................................ 135
5.2.1
“Go/No go” tests for integrated devices .................................................................................... 135
5.2.2
RF functional tests ..................................................................................................................... 135
Appendix ........................................................................................................................ 137
A Migration between TOBY-L2 and TOBY-R2 ............................................................ 137
A.1
A.2
Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 137
Pin-out comparison between TOBY-L2 and TOBY-R2 ........................................................................ 139
A.3
Schematic for TOBY-L2 and TOBY-R2 integration ............................................................................. 141
Glossary .................................................................................................................... 142
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Contents
Page 6 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Related documents......................................................................................................... 144
Revision history .............................................................................................................. 145
Contact ............................................................................................................................ 146
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Contents
Page 7 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1 System description
1.1
Overview
The TOBY-R2 series comprises LTE Cat 1 / 3G / 2G multi-mode modules supporting up to five LTE bands, up to
four 3G UMTS/HSPA bands and up to four 2G GSM/(E)GPRS bands for voice and/or data transmission in the
small TOBY LGA form-factor (35.6 x 24.8 mm), easy to integrate in compact designs:

TOBY-R200 are designed for worldwide operation, and primarily in North America (on AT&T network)

TOBY-R201 are designed primarily for operation in North America (on AT&T / Verizon network)

TOBY-R202 are designed primarily for operation in North America (on AT&T network)
TOBY-R2 series modules are form-factor compatible with u-blox SARA, LISA and LARA cellular module families
and are pin-to-pin compatible with u-blox TOBY-L cellular module families: this facilitates easy migration from
the u-blox GSM/GPRS, CDMA, UMTS/HSPA, and LTE high data rate modules, maximizes the investments of
customers, simplifies logistics, and enables very short time-to-market.
The modules are ideal for applications that are transitioning to LTE from 2G and 3G, due to the long term
availability and scalability of LTE networks.
With a range of interface options and an integrated IP stack, the modules are designed to support a wide range
of data-centric applications. The unique combination of performance and flexibility make these modules ideally
suited for medium speed M2M applications, such as smart energy gateways, remote access video cameras,
digital signage, telehealth and telematics.
TOBY-R2 series modules support Voice over LTE (VoLTE) and voice service over 3G (CSFB) for applications that
require voice, such as security and surveillance systems.
Table 1 summarizes the main features and interfaces of TOBY-R2 series modules.
Network indication
Antenna supervisor
Rx Diversity
Jamming detection
Embedded TCP/UDP stack
Embedded HTTP,FTP,SSL
FOTA
Dual stack IPv4/IPv6
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2,4,5,
850,1900
12,13
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2,4,
5,12
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
TOBY-R201
North
America
TOBY-R202
North
America
850,1900
Automotive
Digital audio
●
Professional
GPIOs
●
850,900,
Quad
1900,2100
Standard
DDC (I2C)
●
2,4,
5,12
Analog audio
SDIO
●
North
America
GSM Bands
●
TOBY-R200
UMTS Bands
USB 2.0
Grade
UART
Features
CellLocate®
Audio
AssistNow Software
Interfaces
GNSS via modem
Region Radio Access Technology Positioning
LTE Bands*
Model
* = LTE band 12 is a superset that includes band 17
Table 1: TOBY-R2 series main features summary
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 8 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Table 2 reports a summary of cellular radio access technologies characteristics and features of the modules.
4G LTE
3G UMTS/HSDPA/HSUPA
2G GSM/GPRS/EDGE
3GPP Release 9
Long Term Evolution (LTE)
Evolved Uni.Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA)
Frequency Division Duplex (FDD)
DL Rx Diversity
3GPP Release 9
High Speed Packet Access (HSPA)
UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA)
Frequency Division Duplex (FDD)
DL Rx diversity
3GPP Release 9
Enhanced Data rate GSM Evolution (EDGE)
GSM EGPRS Radio Access (GERA)
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
DL Advanced Rx Performance
Band support1:

TOBY-R200:

Band 12 (700 MHz)2

Band 5 (850 MHz)

Band 4 (1700 MHz)

Band 2 (1900 MHz)

TOBY-R201:

Band 12 (700 MHz)2

Band 13 (750 MHz)

Band 5 (850 MHz)

Band 4 (1700 MHz)

Band 2 (1900 MHz)

TOBY-R202:

Band 12 (700 MHz)2

Band 5 (850 MHz)

Band 4 (1700 MHz)

Band 2 (1900 MHz)
Band support:

TOBY-R200:

Band 5 (850 MHz)

Band 8 (900 MHz)

Band 2 (1900 MHz)

Band 1 (2100 MHz)

TOBY-R201:

Band 5 (850 MHz)

Band 2 (1900 MHz)
Band support:

TOBY-R200:

GSM 850 MHz

E-GSM 900 MHz

DCS 1800 MHz

PCS 1900 MHz
LTE Power Class

Class 3 (23 dBm)
UMTS/HSDPA/HSUPA Power Class

Class 3 (24 dBm)
GSM/GPRS (GMSK) Power Class

Class 4 (33 dBm) for GSM/E-GSM band

Class 1 (30 dBm) for DCS/PCS band
EDGE (8-PSK) Power Class

Class E2 (27 dBm) for GSM/E-GSM band

Class E2 (26 dBm) for DCS/PCS band
Data rate

LTE category 1:
up to 10.3 Mb/s DL, 5.2 Mb/s UL
Data Rate

HSDPA category 8:
up to 7.2 Mb/s DL

HSUPA category 6:
up to 5.76 Mb/s UL
Data Rate3

GPRS multi-slot class 124, CS1-CS4,
up to 85.6 kb/s DL/UL

EDGE multi-slot class 124, MCS1-MCS9,
up to 236.8 kb/s DL/UL

TOBY-R202:

Band 5 (850 MHz)

Band 2 (1900 MHz)
Table 2: TOBY-R2 series LTE, 3G and 2G characteristics summary
TOBY-R2 modules provide Voice over LTE (VoLTE) as well as Circuit-Switched-Fall-Back (CSFB) audio capability.
TOBY-R2 series modules support all the E-UTRA channel bandwidths for each operating band according to 3GPP TS 36.521-1 [21].
LTE band 12 is a superset that includes band 17
GPRS/EDGE multi-slot class determines the number of timeslots available for upload and download and thus the speed at which data can
be transmitted and received, with higher classes typically allowing faster data transfer rates.
GPRS/EDGE multi-slot class 12 implies a maximum of 4 slots in DL (reception) and 4 slots in UL (transmission) with 5 slots in total.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 9 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.2
Architecture
Figure 1 summarizes the internal architecture of TOBY-R2 series modules.
Duplexer
ANT1
Switch
Filters
Filters
LNAs
Filters
ANT_DET
SIM
26 MHz
DDC(I2C)
Duplexer
PAs
Filters
LNAs
Filters
Filters
LNAs
Filters
Filters
LNAs
Filters
Filters
ANT2
PAs
SDIO
RF
Transceiver
UART
Memory
Cellular
Base-band
Processor
Switch
32.768 kHz
GPIO
Digital audio (I2S)
Host Select
VCC (Supply)
V_BCKP (RTC)
USB
Power On
Power Management Unit
V_INT (I/O)
External Reset
Figure 1: TOBY-R2 series modules simplified block diagram
TOBY-R2 series modules internally consists of the RF, Baseband and Power Management sections here described
with more details than the simplified block diagrams of Figure 1.
RF section
The RF section is composed of RF transceiver, PAs, LNAs, crystal oscillator, filters, duplexers and RF switches.
Tx signal is pre-amplified by RF transceiver, then output to the primary antenna input/output port (ANT1) of the
module via power amplifier (PA), SAW band pass filters band, specific duplexer and antenna switch.
Dual receiving paths are implemented according to LTE Receiver Diversity radio technology supported by the
modules as LTE category 1 User Equipments: incoming signal is received through the primary (ANT1) and the
secondary (ANT2) antenna input ports which are connected to the RF transceiver via specific antenna switch,
diplexer, duplexer, LNA, SAW band pass filters.

RF transceiver performs modulation, up-conversion of the baseband I/Q signals for Tx, down-conversion and
demodulation of the dual RF signals for Rx. The RF transceiver contains:
Single chain high linearity receivers with integrated LNAs for multi band multi mode operation,
Highly linear RF demodulator / modulator capable GMSK, 8-PSK, QPSK, 16-QAM,
RF synthesizer,
VCO.

Power Amplifiers (PA) amplify the Tx signal modulated by the RF transceiver

RF switches connect primary (ANT1) and secondary (ANT2) antenna ports to the suitable Tx / Rx path

SAW duplexers and band pass filters separate the Tx and Rx signal paths and provide RF filtering

26 MHz voltage-controlled temperature-controlled crystal oscillator generates the clock reference in
active-mode or connected-mode.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 10 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Baseband and power management section
The Baseband and Power Management section is composed of the following main elements:

A mixed signal ASIC, which integrates
Microprocessor for control functions
DSP core for cellular Layer 1 and digital processing of Rx and Tx signal paths
Memory interface controller
Dedicated peripheral blocks for control of the USB, SIM and generic digital interfaces
Interfaces to RF transceiver ASIC

Memory system, which includes NAND flash and LPDDR2 RAM

Voltage regulators to derive all the subsystem supply voltages from the module supply input VCC

Voltage sources for external use: V_BCKP and V_INT

Hardware power on

Hardware reset

Low power idle-mode support

32.768 kHz crystal oscillator to provide the clock reference in the low power idle-mode, which can be set by
enable power saving configuration using the AT+UPSV command.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 11 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.3
Pin-out
Table 3 lists the pin-out of the TOBY-R2 series modules, with pins grouped by function.
Function
Pin Name
Pin No
I/O
Description
Remarks
Power
VCC
70,71,72
Module supply input
VCC supply circuit affects the RF performance and
compliance of the device integrating the module with
applicable required certification schemes.
See section 1.5.1 for functional description / requirements.
See section 2.2.1 for external circuit design-in.
GND
2, 30, 32, 44, N/A
46, 69, 73, 74,
76, 78, 79, 80,
82, 83, 85, 86,
88-90, 92-152
Ground
GND pins are internally connected each other.
External ground connection affects the RF and thermal
performance of the device.
See section 1.5.1 for functional description.
See section 2.2.1 for external circuit design-in.
V_BCKP
I/O
RTC supply
input/output
V_BCKP = 1.8 V (typical) generated by internal regulator
when valid VCC supply is present.
See section 1.5.2 for functional description.
See section 2.2.2 for external circuit design-in.
V_INT
Generic digital
interfaces supply
output
V_INT = 1.8 V (typical) generated by internal DC/DC
regulator when the module is switched on.
Test-Point for diagnostic access is recommended.
See section 1.5.3 for functional description.
See section 2.2.3 for external circuit design-in.
PWR_ON
20
Power-on input
Internal 10 k pull-up resistor to V_BCKP.
See section 1.6.1 for functional description.
See section 2.3.1 for external circuit design-in.
RESET_N
23
External reset input
Internal 10 k pull-up resistor to V_BCKP.
Test-Point for diagnostic access is recommended.
See section 1.6.3 for functional description.
See section 2.3.2 for external circuit design-in.
HOST_SELECT0
26
I/O
Selection of module
/ host configuration
Not supported.
See section 1.6.4 for functional description.
See section 2.3.3 for external circuit design-in.
HOST_SELECT1
62
I/O
Selection of module
/ host configuration
Not supported.
See section 1.6.4 for functional description.
See section 2.3.3 for external circuit design-in.
ANT1
81
I/O
Primary antenna
Main Tx / Rx antenna interface.
50  nominal characteristic impedance.
Antenna circuit affects the RF performance and application
device compliance with required certification schemes.
See section 1.7 for functional description / requirements.
See section 2.4 for external circuit design-in.
ANT2
87
Secondary antenna
Rx only for Rx diversity.
50  nominal characteristic impedance.
Antenna circuit affects the RF performance and application
device compliance with required certification schemes.
See section 1.7 for functional description / requirements
See section 2.4 for external circuit design-in.
ANT_DET
75
Antenna detection
ADC for antenna presence detection function
See section 1.7.2 for functional description.
See section 2.4.2 for external circuit design-in.
System
Antennas
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 12 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Function
Pin Name
Pin No
I/O
Description
Remarks
SIM
VSIM
59
SIM supply output
VSIM = 1.8 V / 3 V output as per the connected SIM type.
See section 1.8 for functional description.
See section 2.5 for external circuit design-in.
SIM_IO
57
I/O
SIM data
Data input/output for 1.8 V / 3 V SIM
Internal 4.7 k pull-up to VSIM.
See section 1.8 for functional description.
See section 2.5 for external circuit design-in.
SIM_CLK
56
SIM clock
3.25 MHz clock output for 1.8 V / 3 V SIM
See section 1.8 for functional description.
See section 2.5 for external circuit design-in.
SIM_RST
58
SIM reset
Reset output for 1.8 V / 3 V SIM
See section 1.8 for functional description.
See section 2.5 for external circuit design-in.
RXD
17
UART data output
1.8 V output, Circuit 104 (RXD) in ITU-T V.24,
for AT commands, data communication, FOAT, FW update
by u-blox EasyFlash tool and diagnostic.
Test-Point and series 0  for diagnostic access recommended.
See section 1.9.1 for functional description.
See section 2.6.1 for external circuit design-in.
TXD
16
UART data input
1.8 V input, Circuit 103 (TXD) in ITU-T V.24,
for AT commands, data communication, FOAT, FW update
by u-blox EasyFlash tool and diagnostic.
Internal active pull-up to V_INT.
Test-Point and series 0  for diagnostic access recommended.
See section 1.9.1 for functional description.
See section 2.6.1 for external circuit design-in.
CTS
15
UART clear to send
output
1.8 V output, Circuit 106 (CTS) in ITU-T V.24.
See section 1.9.1 for functional description.
See section 2.6.1 for external circuit design-in.
RTS
14
UART ready to send
input
1.8 V input, Circuit 105 (RTS) in ITU-T V.24.
Internal active pull-up to V_INT.
See section 1.9.1 for functional description.
See section 2.6.1 for external circuit design-in.
DSR
10
UART data set ready
output
1.8 V, Circuit 107 in ITU-T V.24.
See section 1.9.1 for functional description.
See section 2.6.1 for external circuit design-in.
RI
11
UART ring indicator
output
1.8 V, Circuit 125 in ITU-T V.24.
See section 1.9.1 for functional description.
See section 2.6.1 for external circuit design-in.
DTR
13
UART data terminal
ready input
1.8 V, Circuit 108/2 in ITU-T V.24.
Internal active pull-up to V_INT.
Test-Point and series 0  for diagnostic access recommended.
See section 1.9.1 for functional description.
See section 2.6.1 for external circuit design-in.
DCD
12
UART data carrier
detect output
1.8 V, Circuit 109 in ITU-T V.24.
Test-Point and series 0  for diagnostic access recommended.
See section 1.9.1 for functional description.
See section 2.6.1 for external circuit design-in.
UART
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 13 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Function
Pin Name
Pin No
I/O
Description
Remarks
USB
VUSB_DET
USB detect input
VBUS (5 V typical) USB supply generated by the host must
be connected to this input pin to enable the USB interface.
If the USB interface is not used by the Application Processor,
Test-Point for diagnostic / FW update access is recommended
See section 1.9.2 for functional description.
See section 2.6.2 for external circuit design-in.
USB_D-
27
I/O
USB Data Line D-
USB interface for AT commands, data communication,
FOAT, FW update by u-blox EasyFlash tool and diagnostic.
90  nominal differential impedance (Z0)
30  nominal common mode impedance (ZCM)
Pull-up or pull-down resistors and external series resistors as
required by the USB 2.0 specifications [6] are part of the
USB pin driver and need not be provided externally.
If the USB interface is not used by the Application Processor,
Test-Point for diagnostic / FW update access is recommended.
See section 1.9.2 for functional description.
See section 2.6.2 for external circuit design-in.
USB_D+
28
I/O
USB Data Line D+
USB interface for AT commands, data communication,
FOAT, FW update by u-blox EasyFlash tool and diagnostic.
90  nominal differential impedance (Z0)
30  nominal common mode impedance (ZCM)
Pull-up or pull-down resistors and external series resistors as
required by the USB 2.0 specifications [6] are part of the
USB pin driver and need not be provided externally.
If the USB interface is not used by the Application Processor,
Test-Point for diagnostic / FW update access is recommended.
See section 1.9.2 for functional description.
See section 2.6.2 for external circuit design-in.
SCL
54
I2C bus clock line
1.8 V open drain, for communication with I2C-slave devices.
See section 1.9.3 for functional description.
See section 2.6.3 for external circuit design-in.
SDA
55
I/O
I2C bus data line
1.8 V open drain, for communication with I2C-slave devices.
See section 1.9.3 for functional description.
See section 2.6.3 for external circuit design-in.
SDIO_D0
66
I/O
SDIO serial data [0]
Not supported by “02” product versions.
SDIO interface for communication with u-blox Wi-Fi module
See section 1.9.4 for functional description.
See section 2.6.4 for external circuit design-in.
SDIO_D1
68
I/O
SDIO serial data [1]
Not supported by “02” product versions.
SDIO interface for communication with u-blox Wi-Fi module
See section 1.9.4 for functional description.
See section 2.6.4 for external circuit design-in.
SDIO_D2
63
I/O
SDIO serial data [2]
Not supported by “02” product versions.
SDIO interface for communication with u-blox Wi-Fi module
See section 1.9.4 for functional description.
See section 2.6.4 for external circuit design-in.
SDIO_D3
67
I/O
SDIO serial data [3]
Not supported by “02” product versions.
SDIO interface for communication with u-blox Wi-Fi module
See section 1.9.4 for functional description.
See section 2.6.4 for external circuit design-in.
SDIO_CLK
64
SDIO serial clock
Not supported by “02” product versions.
SDIO interface for communication with u-blox Wi-Fi module
See section 1.9.4 for functional description.
See section 2.6.4 for external circuit design-in.
SDIO_CMD
65
I/O
SDIO command
Not supported by “02” product versions.
SDIO interface for communication with u-blox Wi-Fi module
See section 1.9.4 for functional description.
See section 2.6.4 for external circuit design-in.
DDC
SDIO
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 14 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Function
Audio
GPIO
Reserved
Pin Name
Pin No
I/O
Description
Remarks
I2S_TXD
51
O/
I/O
I S transmit data /
GPIO
I2S transmit data output, alternatively configurable as GPIO.
See sections 1.10 and 1.11 for functional description.
See sections 2.7 and 2.8 for external circuit design-in.
I2S_RXD
53
I/
I/O
I2S receive data /
GPIO
I2S receive data input, alternatively configurable as GPIO.
See sections 1.10 and 1.11 for functional description.
See sections 2.7 and 2.8 for external circuit design-in.
I2S_CLK
52
I/O /
I/O
I2S clock /
GPIO
I2S serial clock, alternatively configurable as GPIO.
See sections 1.10 and 1.11 for functional description.
See sections 2.7 and 2.8 for external circuit design-in.
I2S_WA
50
I/O /
I/O
I2S word alignment /
GPIO
I2S word alignment, alternatively configurable as GPIO.
See sections 1.10 and 1.11 for functional description.
See sections 2.7 and 2.8 for external circuit design-in.
GPIO1
21
I/O
GPIO
1.8 V GPIO with alternatively configurable functions.
See section 1.11 for functional description.
See section 2.8 for external circuit design-in.
GPIO2
22
I/O
GPIO
1.8 V GPIO with alternatively configurable functions.
See section 1.11 for functional description.
See section 2.8 for external circuit design-in.
GPIO3
24
I/O
GPIO
1.8 V GPIO with alternatively configurable functions.
See section 1.11 for functional description.
See section 2.8 for external circuit design-in.
GPIO4
25
I/O
GPIO
1.8 V GPIO with alternatively configurable functions.
See section 1.11 for functional description.
See section 2.8 for external circuit design-in.
GPIO5
60
I/O
GPIO
1.8 V GPIO with alternatively configurable functions.
See section 1.11 for functional description.
See section 2.8 for external circuit design-in.
GPIO6
61
I/O
GPIO
1.8 V GPIO with alternatively configurable functions.
See section 1.11 for functional description.
See section 2.8 for external circuit design-in.
RSVD
N/A
Reserved pin
This pin must be connected to ground.
See sections 1.12 and 2.9
RSVD
18, 19
N/A
Reserved pin
Test-Point for diagnostic access is recommended.
See sections 1.12 and 2.9
RSVD
1, 7-9, 29,
31, 33-43,
45, 47-49,
77, 84, 91
N/A
Reserved pin
Leave unconnected.
See sections 1.12 and 2.9
Table 3: TOBY-R2 series module pin definition, grouped by function
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 15 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.4
Operating modes
TOBY-R2 series modules have several operating modes. The operating modes are defined in Table 4 and
described in detail in Table 5, providing general guidelines for operation.
General Status
Operating Mode
Definition
Power-down
Not-Powered Mode
Power-Off Mode
VCC supply not present or below operating range: module is switched off.
VCC supply within operating range and module is switched off.
Normal Operation
Idle-Mode
Active-Mode
Module processor core runs with 32 kHz reference generated by the internal oscillator.
Module processor core runs with 26 MHz reference generated by the internal oscillator.
Connected-Mode
RF Tx/Rx data connection enabled and processor core runs with 26 MHz reference.
Table 4: TOBY-R2 series modules operating modes definition
Mode
Description
Transition between operating modes
Not-Powered
Module is switched off.
Application interfaces are not accessible.
When VCC supply is removed, the modules enter not-powered mode.
When in not-powered mode, the modules cannot be switched on by
PWR_ON, RESET_N or RTC alarm
When in not-powered mode, the modules can be switched on by
applying VCC supply (see 1.6.1) so that the modules switch from notpowered to active-mode
Power-Off
Module is switched off: normal shutdown by an
appropriate power-off event (see 1.6.2).
Application interfaces are not accessible.
Idle
Module is switched on with application
interfaces temporarily disabled or suspended:
the module is temporarily not ready to
communicate with an external device by means
of the application interfaces as configured to
reduce the current consumption.
The module enters the low power idle-mode
whenever possible if power saving is enabled by
AT+UPSV (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2])
reducing current consumption (see 1.5.1.5).
The CTS output line indicates when the UART
interface is disabled/enabled due to the module
idle/active-mode according to power saving and
HW flow control settings (see 1.9.1.3, 1.9.1.4).
Power saving configuration is not enabled by
default: it can be enabled by AT+UPSV (see the
u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]).
When the modules are switched off by an appropriate power-off event
(see 1.6.2), the modules enter power-off mode from active-mode.
When in power-off mode, the modules can be switched on by
PWR_ON, RESET_N or an RTC alarm.
When in power-off mode, the modules enter not-powered mode by
removing VCC supply.
The modules automatically switch from the active-mode to low power
idle-mode whenever possible if power saving is enabled (see sections
1.5.1.5, 1.9.1.4, 1.9.2.4 and u-blox AT Commands Manual [2],
AT+UPSV command).
The modules wake up from low power idle-mode to active-mode in the
following events:

Automatic periodic monitoring of the paging channel for the
paging block reception according to network conditions (see
1.5.1.5, 1.9.1.4)

Automatic periodic enable of the UART interface to receive / send
data, with AT+UPSV=1 (see 1.9.1.4)

Data received over UART, according to HW flow control (AT&K)
and power saving (AT+UPSV) settings (see 1.9.1.4)

RTS input set ON by the host DTE, with HW flow control disabled
and AT+UPSV=2 (see 1.9.1.4)

DTR input set ON by the host DTE, with AT+UPSV=3 (see 1.9.1.4)

USB detection, applying 5 V (typ.) to VUSB_DET input (see 1.9.2)

The connected USB host forces a remote wakeup of the module as
USB device (see 1.9.2.4)

The connected u-blox GNSS receiver forces a wakeup of the
cellular module using the GNSS Tx data ready function over GPIO3
(see 1.9.3)

The connected SDIO device forces a wakeup of the module as
SDIO host (see 1.9.4)

A preset RTC alarm occurs (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2],
AT+CALA)
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 16 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Mode
Description
Transition between operating modes
Active
Module is switched on with application
interfaces enabled or not suspended: the
module is ready to communicate with an
external device by means of the application
interfaces unless power saving configuration is
enabled by AT+UPSV (see 1.9.1.4, 1.9.2.4 and
u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]).
When the modules are switched on by an appropriate power-on event
(see 1.6.1), the module enter active-mode from not-powered or
power-off mode.
If power saving configuration is enabled by the AT+UPSV command,
the module automatically switches from active to idle-mode whenever
possible and the module wakes up from idle to active-mode in the
events listed above (see idle-mode to active-mode transition description
above).
When a RF Tx/Rx data or voice connection is initiated or when RF Tx/Rx
is required due to a connection previously initiated, the module
switches from active to connected-mode.
Connected
RF Tx/Rx data connection is in progress.
The module is prepared to accept data signals
from an external device unless power saving
configuration is enabled by AT+UPSV (see
sections 1.9.1.4, 1.9.2.4 and u-blox AT
Commands Manual [2]).
When a data or voice connection is initiated, the module enters
connected-mode from active-mode.
Connected-mode is suspended if Tx/Rx data is not in progress, due to
connected discontinuous reception and fast dormancy capabilities of
the module and according to network environment settings and
scenario. In such case, the module automatically switches from
connected to active mode and then, if power saving configuration is
enabled by the AT+UPSV command, the module automatically switches
to idle-mode whenever possible. Vice-versa, the module wakes up from
idle to active mode and then connected mode if RF Tx/Rx is necessary.
When a data connection is terminated, the module returns to the
active-mode.
Table 5: TOBY-R2 series modules operating modes description
Figure 2 describes the transition between the different operating modes.
Not
powered
Remove VCC
Switch ON:
• Apply VCC
Power off
Switch ON:
• PWR_ON
• RTC alarm
• RESET_N
Switch OFF:
• AT+CPWROFF
Incoming/outgoing call or
other dedicated device
network communication
Connected
If power saving is enabled
and there is no activity for
a defined time interval
Active
No RF Tx/Rx in progress,
Call terminated,
Communication dropped
Idle
Any wake up event described
in the module operating
modes summary table above
Figure 2: TOBY-R2 series modules operating modes transitions
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 17 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.5
1.5.1
Supply interfaces
Module supply input (VCC)
The modules must be supplied via the three VCC pins that represent the module power supply input.
The VCC pins are internally connected to the RF power amplifier and to the integrated Power Management Unit:
all supply voltages needed by the module are generated from the VCC supply by integrated voltage regulators,
including V_BCKP Real Time Clock supply, V_INT digital interfaces supply and VSIM SIM card supply.
During operation, the current drawn by the TOBY-R2 series modules through the VCC pins can vary by several
orders of magnitude. This ranges from the pulse of current consumption during GSM transmitting bursts at
maximum power level in connected-mode (as described in section 1.5.1.2) to the low current consumption
during low power idle-mode with power saving enabled (as described in section 1.5.1.5).
TOBY-R200 modules provide separate supply inputs over the three VCC pins:

VCC pins #71 and #72 represent the supply input for the internal RF power amplifier, demanding most of
the total current drawn of the module when RF transmission is enabled during a voice/data call

VCC pin #70 represents the supply input for the internal baseband Power Management Unit and the internal
transceiver, demanding minor part of the total current drawn of the module when RF transmission is
enabled during a voice/data call
Figure 3 provides a simplified block diagram of TOBY-R2 series modules internal VCC supply routing.
TOBY-R201 / TOBY-R202
TOBY-R200
LTE/3G PAs
VCC 72
RF PMU
VCC 70
VCC 72
Transceiver
VCC 71
Power
Management
Unit
LTE/3G/2G PAs
Baseband
Processor
RF PMU
Transceiver
VCC 71
VCC 70
Memory
Power
Management
Unit
Baseband
Processor
Memory
Figure 3: TOBY-R2 series modules internal VCC supply routing simplified block diagram
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 18 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.5.1.1 VCC supply requirements
Table 6 summarizes the requirements for the VCC modules supply. See section 2.2.1 for suggestions to properly
design a VCC supply circuit compliant with the requirements listed in Table 6.
The supply circuit affects the RF compliance of the device integrating TOBY-R2 series modules
with applicable required certification schemes as well as antenna circuit design. Compliance is
guaranteed if the requirements summarized in the Table 6 are fulfilled.
Item
Requirement
Remark
VCC nominal voltage
Within VCC normal operating range:
3.30 V min. / 4.40 V max
RF performance is guaranteed when VCC PA voltage is
inside the normal operating range limits.
RF performance may be affected when VCC PA voltage is
outside the normal operating range limits, though the
module is still fully functional until the VCC voltage is
inside the extended operating range limits.
VCC voltage during
normal operation
Within VCC extended operating range:
3.00 V min. / 4.50 V max
VCC voltage must be above the extended operating range
minimum limit to switch-on the module.
The module may switch-off when the VCC voltage drops
below the extended operating range minimum limit.
Operation above VCC extended operating range is not
recommended and may affect device reliability.
VCC average current
Support with adequate margin the highest averaged
VCC current consumption value in connected-mode
conditions specified in TOBY-R2 Data Sheet [1].
The maximum average current consumption can be
greater than the specified value according to the actual
antenna mismatching, temperature and supply voltage.
Sections 1.5.1.2, 1.5.1.3 and 1.5.1.4 describe current
consumption profiles in 2G, 3G and LTE connected-mode.
VCC peak current
Support with margin the highest peak VCC current
consumption value in connected-mode conditions
specified in TOBY-R2 Data Sheet [1]
The specified maximum peak of current consumption
occurs during GSM single transmit slot in 850/900 MHz
connected-mode, in case of mismatched antenna.
Section 1.5.1.2 describes 2G Tx peak/pulse current.
VCC voltage drop
during 2G Tx slots
Lower than 400 mV
Supply voltage drop values greater than recommended
during 2G TDMA transmission slots directly affect the RF
compliance with applicable certification schemes.
Figure 5 describes supply voltage drop during 2G Tx slots.
VCC voltage ripple
during 2G/3G/LTE Tx
Noise in the supply has to be minimized
High supply voltage ripple values during LTE/3G/2G RF
transmissions in connected-mode directly affect the RF
compliance with applicable certification schemes.
Figure 5 describes supply voltage ripple during RF Tx.
VCC under/over-shoot Absent or at least minimized
at start/end of Tx slots
Supply voltage under-shoot or over-shoot at the start or
the end of 2G TDMA transmission slots directly affect the
RF compliance with applicable certification schemes.
Figure 5 describes supply voltage under/over-shoot
Table 6: Summary of VCC modules supply requirements
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 19 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.5.1.2 VCC current consumption in 2G connected-mode
When a GSM call is established, the VCC module current consumption is determined by the current
consumption profile typical of the GSM transmitting and receiving bursts.
The peak of current consumption during a transmission slot is strictly dependent on the RF transmitted power,
which is regulated by the network (the current base station). The transmitted power in the transmit slot is also
the more relevant factor for determining the average current consumption.
If the module is transmitting in 2G single-slot mode in the 850 or 900 MHz bands, at the maximum RF power
level (approximately 2 W or 33 dBm in the allocated transmit slot/burst) the current consumption can reach an
high peak (see the “Current consumption” section in the TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1]) for 576.9 µs (width of
the transmit slot/burst) with a periodicity of 4.615 ms (width of 1 frame = 8 slots/burst), so with a 1/8 duty cycle
according to GSM TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access).
If the module is transmitting in 2G single-slot mode in the 1800 or 1900 MHz bands, the current consumption
figures are quite less high than the one in the low bands, due to 3GPP transmitter output power specifications.
During a GSM call, current consumption is not so significantly high in receiving or in monitor bursts and is low in
the inactive unused bursts.
Figure 4 shows an example of the module current consumption profile versus time in 2G single-slot mode.
Current [A]
2.5
1900 mA
2.0
1.5
Peak current depends
on TX power and
actual antenna load
1.0
0.5
200 mA
60-120 mA
0.0
RX
slot
60-120 mA
10-40 mA
unused unused
slot
slot
TX
slot
unused unused
slot
slot
MON
slot
unused
slot
RX
slot
unused unused
slot
slot
GSM frame
4.615 ms
(1 frame = 8 slots)
TX
slot
unused unused
slot
slot
MON
slot
unused
slot
Time [ms]
GSM frame
4.615 ms
(1 frame = 8 slots)
Figure 4: VCC current consumption profile versus time during a 2G single-slot call (1 TX slot, 1 RX slot)
Figure 5 illustrates VCC voltage profile versus time during a 2G single-slot call, according to the relative VCC
current consumption profile described in Figure 4.
Voltage [mV]
overshoot
3.8 V
(typ)
drop
ripple
RX
slot
unused unused
slot
slot
TX
slot
undershoot
unused unused
slot
slot
GSM frame
4.615 ms
(1 frame = 8 slots)
MON
slot
unused
slot
RX
slot
unused unused
slot
slot
TX
slot
unused unused
slot
slot
MON
slot
GSM frame
4.615 ms
(1 frame = 8 slots)
unused
slot
Time [ms]
Figure 5: VCC voltage profile versus time during a 2G single-slot call (1 TX slot, 1 RX slot)
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 20 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
When a GPRS connection is established, more than one slot can be used to transmit and/or more than one slot
can be used to receive. The transmitted power depends on network conditions, which set the peak current
consumption, but following the 3GPP specifications the maximum Tx RF power is reduced if more than one slot
is used to transmit, so the maximum peak of current is not as high as can be in case of a 2G single-slot call.
The multi-slot transmission power can be further reduced by configuring the actual Multi-Slot Power Reduction
profile with the dedicated AT command, AT+UDCONF=40 (see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]).
If the module transmits in GPRS class 12 in the 850 or 900 MHz bands, at the maximum RF power control level,
the current consumption can reach a quite high peak but lower than the one achievable in 2G single-slot mode.
This happens for 2.307 ms (width of the 4 transmit slots/bursts) with a periodicity of 4.615 ms (width of 1 frame
= 8 slots/bursts), so with a 1/2 duty cycle, according to 2G TDMA.
If the module is in GPRS connected mode in the 1800 or 1900 MHz bands, the current consumption figures are
quite less high than the one in the low bands, due to 3GPP transmitter output power specifications.
Figure 6 reports the current consumption profiles in GPRS class 12 connected mode, in the 850 or 900 MHz
bands, with 4 slots used to transmit and 1 slot used to receive.
Current [A]
2.5
1600 mA
2.0
1.5
Peak current depends
on TX power and
actual antenna load
1.0
0.5
200mA
60-130mA
0.0
RX
slot
unused
slot
TX
slot
TX
slot
TX
slot
TX
slot
GSM frame
4.615 ms
(1 frame = 8 slots)
MON
slot
unused
slot
RX
slot
unused
slot
TX
slot
TX
slot
TX
slot
TX
slot
MON
slot
unused
slot
Time [ms]
GSM frame
4.615 ms
(1 frame = 8 slots)
Figure 6: VCC current consumption profile during a 2G GPRS/EDGE multi-slot connection (4 TX slots, 1 RX slot)
In case of EDGE connections the VCC current consumption profile is very similar to the GPRS current profile, so
the image shown in Figure 6, representing the current consumption profile in GPRS class 12 connected mode, is
valid for the EDGE class 12 connected mode as well.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 21 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.5.1.3 VCC current consumption in 3G connected mode
During a 3G connection, the module can transmit and receive continuously due to the Frequency Division Duplex
(FDD) mode of operation with the Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA).
The current consumption depends on output RF power, which is always regulated by the network (the current
base station) sending power control commands to the module. These power control commands are logically
divided into a slot of 666 µs, thus the rate of power change can reach a maximum rate of 1.5 kHz.
There are no high current peaks as in the 2G connection, since transmission and reception are continuously
enabled due to FDD WCDMA implemented in the 3G that differs from the TDMA implemented in the 2G case.
In the worst scenario, corresponding to a continuous transmission and reception at maximum output power
(approximately 250 mW or 24 dBm), the average current drawn by the module at the VCC pins is considerable
(see the “Current consumption” section in TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1]). At the lowest output RF power
(approximately 0.01 µW or –50 dBm), the current drawn by the internal power amplifier is strongly reduced. The
total current drawn by the module at the VCC pins is due to baseband processing and transceiver activity.
Figure 7 shows an example of current consumption profile of the module in 3G WCDMA/DC-HSPA+ continuous
transmission mode.
Current [mA]
700
600
850 mA
500
400
Current consumption value
depends on TX power and
actual antenna load
300
200
170 mA
100
1 slot
666 µs
Time
[ms]
3G frame
10 ms
(1 frame = 15 slots)
Figure 7: VCC current consumption profile versus time during a 3G connection (TX and RX continuously enabled)
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 22 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.5.1.4 VCC current consumption in LTE connected-mode
During an LTE connection, the module can transmit and receive continuously due to the Frequency Division
Duplex (FDD) mode of operation used in LTE radio access technology.
The current consumption depends on output RF power, which is always regulated by the network (the current
base station) sending power control commands to the module. These power control commands are logically
divided into a slot of 0.5 ms (time length of one Resource Block), thus the rate of power change can reach a
maximum rate of 2 kHz.
The current consumption profile is similar to that in 3G radio access technology. Unlike the 2G connection
mode, which uses the TDMA mode of operation, there are no high current peaks since transmission and
reception are continuously enabled in FDD.
In the worst scenario, corresponding to a continuous transmission and reception at maximum output power
(approximately 250 mW or 24 dBm), the average current drawn by the module at the VCC pins is considerable
(see the “Current consumption” section in TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1]). At the lowest output RF power
(approximately 0.1 µW or –40 dBm), the current drawn by the internal power amplifier is strongly reduced and
the total current drawn by the module at the VCC pins is due to baseband processing and transceiver activity.
Figure 8 shows an example of the module current consumption profile versus time in LTE connected-mode.
Detailed current consumption values can be found in TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1].
Current [mA]
700
600
500
Current consumption value
depends on TX power and
actual antenna load
400
300
200
100
1 Slot
1 Resource Block
(0.5 ms)
1 LTE Radio Frame
(10 ms)
Time
[ms]
Figure 8: VCC current consumption profile versus time during LTE connection (TX and RX continuously enabled)
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 23 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.5.1.5 VCC current consumption in cyclic idle/active mode (power saving enabled)
The power saving configuration is by default disabled, but it can be enabled using the AT+UPSV command (see
the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]). When power saving is enabled, the module automatically enters the low
power idle-mode whenever possible, reducing current consumption.
During low power idle-mode, the module processor runs with 32 kHz reference clock frequency.
When the power saving configuration is enabled and the module is registered or attached to a network, the
module automatically enters the low power idle-mode whenever possible, but it must periodically monitor the
paging channel of the current base station (paging block reception), in accordance to the 2G/3G/LTE system
requirements, even if connected-mode is not enabled by the application. When the module monitors the paging
channel, it wakes up to the active-mode, to enable the reception of paging block. In between, the module
switches to low power idle-mode. This is known as discontinuous reception (DRX).
The module processor core is activated during the paging block reception, and automatically switches its
reference clock frequency from 32 kHz to the 26 MHz used in active-mode.
The time period between two paging block receptions is defined by the network. This is the paging period
parameter, fixed by the base station through broadcast channel sent to all users on the same serving cell:

In case of 2G radio access technology, the paging period can vary from 470.8 ms (DRX = 2, length of 2 x 51
2G frames = 2 x 51 x 4.615 ms) up to 2118.4 ms (DRX = 9, length of 9 x 51 2G frames = 9 x 51 x 4.615 ms)

In case of 3G radio access technology, the paging period can vary from 640 ms (DRX = 6, i.e. length of 2
3G frames = 64 x 10 ms) up to 5120 ms (DRX = 9, length of 2 3G frames = 512 x 10 ms).

In case of LTE radio access technology, the paging period can vary from 320 ms (DRX = 5, i.e. length of 2
LTE frames = 32 x 10 ms) up to 2560 ms (DRX = 8, length of 2 LTE frames = 256 x 10 ms).
Figure 9 illustrates a typical example of the module current consumption profile when power saving is enabled.
The module is registered with network, automatically enters the low power idle-mode and periodically wakes up
to active-mode to monitor the paging channel for the paging block reception. Detailed current consumption
values can be found in TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1].
Current [mA]
100
Time [s]
Current [mA]
IDLE MODE
ACTIVE MODE
2G case: 0.44-2.09 s
3G case: 0.61-5.09 s
LTE case: 0.27-2.51 s
~50 ms
100
Active Mode
Enabled
IDLE MODE
RX
Enabled
Idle Mode
Enabled
~50 ms
ACTIVE MODE
Time [ms]
IDLE MODE
Figure 9: VCC current consumption profile with power saving enabled and module registered with the network: the module is
in low-power idle-mode and periodically wakes up to active-mode to monitor the paging channel for paging block reception
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 24 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.5.1.6 VCC current consumption in fixed active-mode (power saving disabled)
When power saving is disabled, the module does not automatically enter the low power idle-mode whenever
possible: the module remains in active-mode. Power saving configuration is by default disabled. It can also be
disabled using the AT+UPSV command (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2] for detail usage).
The module processor core is activated during idle-mode, and the 26 MHz reference clock frequency is used. It
would draw more current during the paging period than that in the power saving mode.
Figure 10 illustrates a typical example of the module current consumption profile when power saving is disabled.
In such case, the module is registered with the network and while active-mode is maintained, the receiver is
periodically activated to monitor the paging channel for paging block reception. Detailed current consumption
values can be found in TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1].
Current [mA]
100
Time [s]
Current [mA]
Paging period
2G case: 0.44-2.09 s
3G case: 0.61-5.09 s
LTE case: 0.32-2.56 s
100
Time [ms]
RX
Enabled
ACTIVE MODE
Figure 10: VCC current consumption profile with power saving disabled and module registered with the network: active-mode
is always held and the receiver is periodically activated to monitor the paging channel for paging block reception
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 25 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.5.2
RTC supply input/output (V_BCKP)
The V_BCKP pin of TOBY-R2 series modules connects the supply for the Real Time Clock (RTC). A linear LDO
regulator integrated in the Power Management Unit internally generates this supply, as shown in Figure 11, with
low current capability (see the TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1]). The output of this regulator is always enabled
when the main module voltage supply applied to the VCC pins is within the valid operating range.
TOBY-R2 series
VCC 70
VCC 71
Power
Management
Baseband
Processor
Linear
LDO
RTC
VCC 72
V_BCKP
32 kHz
Figure 11: TOBY-R2 series RTC supply (V_BCKP) simplified block diagram
The RTC provides the module time reference (date and time) that is used to set the wake-up interval during the
low power idle-mode periods, and is able to make available the programmable alarm functions.
The RTC functions are available also in power-down mode when the V_BCKP voltage is within its valid range
(specified in the “Input characteristics of Supply/Power pins” table in TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1]). The RTC
can be supplied from an external back-up battery through the V_BCKP, when the main module voltage supply is
not applied to the VCC pins. This lets the time reference (date and time) run until the V_BCKP voltage is within
its valid range, even when the main supply is not provided to the module.
Consider that the module cannot switch on if a valid voltage is not present on VCC even when the RTC is
supplied through V_BCKP (meaning that VCC is mandatory to switch on the module).
The RTC has very low current consumption, but is highly temperature dependent. For example, V_BCKP current
consumption at the maximum operating temperature can be higher than the typical value at 25 °C specified in
the “Input characteristics of Supply/Power pins” table in the TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1].
If V_BCKP is left unconnected and the module main supply is not applied to the VCC pins, the RTC is supplied
from the bypass capacitor mounted inside the module. However, this capacitor is not able to provide a long
buffering time: within few milliseconds the voltage on V_BCKP will go below the valid range. This has no impact
on cellular connectivity, as all the module functionalities do not rely on date and time setting.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 26 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.5.3
Generic digital interfaces supply output (V_INT)
The V_INT output pin of the TOBY-R2 series modules is connected to an internal 1.8 V supply with current
capability specified in the TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1]. This supply is internally generated by a switching stepdown regulator integrated in the Power Management Unit and it is internally used to source the generic digital
I/O interfaces of the cellular module, as described in Figure 12. The output of this regulator is enabled when the
module is switched on and it is disabled when the module is switched off.
TOBY-R2 series
VCC 70
VCC 71
Power
Management
Baseband
Processor
Switching
Step-Down
Digital I/O
VCC 72
V_INT 5
Figure 12: TOBY-R2 series generic digital interfaces supply output (V_INT) simplified block diagram
The switching regulator operates in Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) mode for greater efficiency at high output
loads and it automatically switches to Pulse Frequency Modulation (PFM) power save mode for greater efficiency
at low output loads. The V_INT output voltage ripple is specified in the TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1].
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 27 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.6
System function interfaces
1.6.1
Module power-on
When the TOBY-R2 series modules are in the not-powered mode (switched off, i.e. the VCC module supply is
not applied), they can be switched on as following:

Rising edge on the VCC supply input to a valid voltage for module supply, starting from a voltage value
lower than 2.25 V, so that the module switches on applying a proper VCC supply within the normal
operating range.

Alternately, the RESET_N pin can be held to the low level during the VCC rising edge, so that the module
switches on releasing the RESET_N pin when the VCC module supply voltage stabilizes at its proper nominal
value within the normal operating range.
The status of the PWR_ON input pin of TOBY-R2 series modules while applying the VCC module supply is not
relevant: during this phase the PWR_ON pin can be set high or low by the external circuit.
When the TOBY-R2 series modules are in the power-off mode (i.e. switched off with valid VCC module supply
applied), they can be switched on as following:

Low pulse on the PWR_ON pin, which is normally set high by an internal pull-up, for a valid time period.

Rising edge on the RESET_N pin, i.e. releasing the pin from the low level, as that the pin is normally set high
by an internal pull-up.

RTC alarm, i.e. pre-programmed alarm by AT+CALA command (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]).
As described in Figure 13, the TOBY-R2 series PWR_ON input is equipped with an internal active pull-up resistor
to the V_BCKP supply: the PWR_ON input voltage thresholds are different from the other generic digital
interfaces. Detailed electrical characteristics are described in TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1].
TOBY-R2 series
V_BCKP
Power
Management
Baseband
Processor
Power-on
Power-on
10k
PWR_ON 20
Figure 13: TOBY-R2 series PWR_ON input description
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 28 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Figure 14 shows the module power-on sequence from the not-powered mode, describing the following phases:

The external supply is applied to the VCC module supply inputs, representing the start-up event.

The V_BCKP RTC supply output is suddenly enabled by the module as VCC reaches a valid voltage value.

The PWR_ON and the RESET_N pins suddenly rise to high logic level due to internal pull-ups.

All the generic digital pins of the module are tri-stated until the switch-on of their supply source (V_INT).

The internal reset signal is held low: the baseband core and all the digital pins are held in the reset state. The
reset state of all the digital pins is reported in the pin description table of TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1].

When the internal reset signal is released, any digital pin is set in a proper sequence from the reset state to
the default operational configured state. The duration of this pins’ configuration phase differs within generic
digital interfaces and the USB interface due to host / device enumeration timings (see section 1.9.2).

The module is fully ready to operate after all interfaces are configured.
Start of interface
configuration
Start-up
event
Module interfaces
are configured
VCC
V_BCKP
PWR_ON
RESET_N
V_INT
Internal Reset
OFF
System State
BB Pads State
Tristate / Floating
ON
Internal Reset Internal Reset → Operational Operational
Figure 14: TOBY-R2 series power-on sequence description
The greeting text can be activated by means of +CSGT AT command (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]) to
notify the external application that the module is ready to operate (i.e. ready to reply to AT commands) and the
first AT command can be sent to the module, given that autobauding has to be disabled on the UART to let the
module sending the greeting text: the UART has to be configured at fixed baud rate (the baud rate of the
application processor) instead of the default autobauding, otherwise the module does not know the baud rate
to be used for sending the greeting text (or any other URC) at the end of the internal boot sequence.
The Internal Reset signal is not available on a module pin, but the host application can monitor the V_INT
pin to sense the start of the TOBY-R2 series module power-on sequence.
Before the switch-on of the generic digital interface supply source (V_INT) of the module, no voltage
driven by an external application should be applied to any generic digital interface of the module.
Before the TOBY-R2 series module is fully ready to operate, the host application processor should not
send any AT command over the AT communication interfaces (USB, UART) of the module.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 29 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.6.2
Module power-off
TOBY-R2 series can be properly switched off by:

AT+CPWROFF command (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]). The current parameter settings are saved in
the module’s non-volatile memory and a proper network detach is performed.
An abrupt under-voltage shutdown occurs on TOBY-R2 series modules when the VCC module supply is
removed. If this occurs, it is not possible to perform the storing of the current parameter settings in the module’s
non-volatile memory or to perform the proper network detach.
It is highly recommended to avoid an abrupt removal of the VCC supply during TOBY-R2 series modules
normal operations: the power off procedure must be started by the AT+CPWROFF command, waiting the
command response for a proper time period (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]), and then a proper
VCC supply has to be held at least until the end of the modules’ internal power off sequence, which
occurs when the generic digital interfaces supply output (V_INT) is switched off by the module.
An abrupt hardware shutdown occurs on TOBY-R2 series modules when a low level is applied on RESET_N pin.
In this case, the current parameter settings are not saved in the module’s non-volatile memory and a proper
network detach is not performed.
It is highly recommended to avoid an abrupt hardware shutdown of the module by forcing a low level on
the RESET_N input pin during module normal operation: the RESET_N line should be set low only if reset
or shutdown via AT commands fails or if the module does not reply to a specific AT command after a time
period longer than the one defined in the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2].
An over-temperature or an under-temperature shutdown occurs on TOBY-R2 series modules when the
temperature measured within the cellular module reaches the dangerous area, if the optional Smart
Temperature Supervisor feature is enabled and configured by the dedicated AT command. For more details see
section 1.13.15 and u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +USTS AT command.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 30 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Figure 15 describes the TOBY-R2 power-off sequence by means of AT+CPWROFF with the following phases:

When the +CPWROFF AT command is sent, the module starts the switch-off routine.

The module replies OK on the AT interface: the switch-off routine is in progress.

At the end of the switch-off routine, all the digital pins are tri-stated and all the internal voltage regulators
are turned off, including the generic digital interfaces supply (V_INT), except the RTC supply (V_BCKP).

Then, the module remains in power-off mode as long as a switch on event does not occur (e.g. applying a
proper low level to the PWR_ON input, or applying a proper low level to the RESET_N input), and enters
not-powered mode if the supply is removed from the VCC pins.
AT+CPWROFF
sent to the module
OK
replied by the module
VCC
can be removed
VCC
V_BCKP
PWR_ON
RESET_N
V_INT
Internal Reset
ON
System State
BB Pads State
Operational
OFF
Tristate / Floating
Operational → Tristate
0s
~2.5 s
Figure 15: TOBY-R2 series power-off sequence description
~5 s
The Internal Reset signal is not available on a module pin, but the application can monitor the V_INT pin
to sense the end of the power-off sequence.
The duration of each phase in the TOBY-R2 series modules’ switch-off routines can largely vary depending
on the application / network settings and the concurrent module activities.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 31 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.6.3
Module reset
TOBY-R2 series modules can be properly reset (rebooted) by:
 AT+CFUN command (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]).
In the case listed above an “internal” or “software” reset of the module is executed: the current parameter
settings are saved in the module’s non-volatile memory and a proper network detach is performed.
An abrupt hardware reset occurs on TOBY-R2 series modules when a low level is applied on RESET_N input pin.
In this case, the current parameter settings are not saved in the module’s non-volatile memory and a proper
network detach is not performed.
It is highly recommended to avoid an abrupt hardware reset of the module by forcing a low level on the
RESET_N input during modules normal operation: the RESET_N line should be set low only if reset or
shutdown via AT commands fails or if the module does not provide a reply to a specific AT command
after a time period longer than the one defined in the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2].
As described in Figure 16, the RESET_N input pins are equipped with an internal pull-up to the V_BCKP supply.
TOBY-R2 series
V_BCKP
Power
Management
Baseband
Processor
Reset
Reset
10k
RESET_N 23
Figure 16: TOBY-R2 series RESET_N input equivalent circuit description
For more electrical characteristics details see TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1].
1.6.4 Module / host configuration selection
Selection of module / host configuration over HOST_SELECT0 and HOST_SELECT1 pins is not supported.
TOBY-R2 series modules include two pins (HOST_SELECT0, HOST_SELECT1) for the selection of the module /
host application processor configuration.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 32 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.7
Antenna interface
1.7.1
Antenna RF interfaces (ANT1 / ANT2)
TOBY-R2 series modules provide two RF interfaces for connecting the external antennas:

The ANT1 represents the primary RF input/output for transmission and reception of LTE/3G/2G RF signals.
The ANT1 pin has a nominal characteristic impedance of 50  and must be connected to the primary Tx / Rx
antenna through a 50  transmission line to allow proper RF transmission and reception.

The ANT2 represents the secondary RF input for the reception of the LTE RF signals for the Down-Link Rx
diversity radio technology supported by TOBY-R2 series modules as required feature for LTE category 1 UEs.
The ANT2 pin has a nominal characteristic impedance of 50  and must be connected to the secondary Rx
antenna through a 50  transmission line to allow proper RF reception.
1.7.1.1
Antenna RF interfaces requirements
Table 7, Table 8 and Table 9 summarize the requirements for the antennas RF interfaces (ANT1 / ANT2). See
section 2.4.1 for suggestions to properly design antennas circuits compliant with these requirements.
The antenna circuits affect the RF compliance of the device integrating TOBY-R2 series modules
with applicable required certification schemes (for more details see section 4). Compliance is
guaranteed if the antenna RF interfaces (ANT1 / ANT2) requirements summarized in Table 7,
Table 8 and Table 9 are fulfilled.
Item
Requirements
Remarks
Impedance
50  nominal characteristic impedance
Frequency Range
See the TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1]
The impedance of the antenna RF connection must match the 50 
impedance of the ANT1 port.
The required frequency range of the antenna connected to ANT1 port
depends on the operating bands of the used cellular module and the
used mobile network.
Return Loss
S11 < -10 dB (VSWR < 2:1) recommended
S11 < -6 dB (VSWR < 3:1) acceptable
Efficiency
> -1.5 dB ( > 70% ) recommended
> -3.0 dB ( > 50% ) acceptable
Maximum Gain
According to radiation exposure limits
Input Power
> 33 dBm ( > 2 W )
The Return loss or the S11, as the VSWR, refers to the amount of
reflected power, measuring how well the antenna RF connection
matches the 50  characteristic impedance of the ANT1 port.
The impedance of the antenna termination must match as much as
possible the 50  nominal impedance of the ANT1 port over the
operating frequency range, reducing as much as possible the amount
of reflected power.
The radiation efficiency is the ratio of the radiated power to the power
delivered to antenna input: the efficiency is a measure of how well an
antenna receives or transmits.
The radiation efficiency of the antenna connected to the ANT1 port
needs to be enough high over the operating frequency range to
comply with the Over-The-Air (OTA) radiated performance
requirements, as Total Radiated Power (TRP) and the Total Isotropic
Sensitivity (TIS), specified by applicable related certification schemes.
The power gain of an antenna is the radiation efficiency multiplied by
the directivity: the gain describes how much power is transmitted in
the direction of peak radiation to that of an isotropic source.
The maximum gain of the antenna connected to ANT1 port must not
exceed the herein stated value to comply with regulatory agencies
radiation exposure limits.
For additional info see sections 4.2.2 and/or 4.3.1
The antenna connected to the ANT1 port must support with adequate
margin the maximum power transmitted by the modules
Table 7: Summary of primary Tx/Rx antenna RF interface (ANT1) requirements
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 33 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Item
Requirements
Remarks
Impedance
50  nominal characteristic impedance
Frequency Range
See the TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1]
Return Loss
S11 < -10 dB (VSWR < 2:1) recommended
S11 < -6 dB (VSWR < 3:1) acceptable
Efficiency
> -1.5 dB ( > 70% ) recommended
> -3.0 dB ( > 50% ) acceptable
The impedance of the antenna RF connection must match the 50 
impedance of the ANT2 port.
The required frequency range of the antennas connected to ANT2
port depends on the operating bands of the used cellular module and
the used Mobile Network.
The Return loss or the S11, as the VSWR, refers to the amount of
reflected power, measuring how well the antenna RF connection
matches the 50  characteristic impedance of the ANT2 port.
The impedance of the antenna termination must match as much as
possible the 50  nominal impedance of the ANT2 port over the
operating frequency range, reducing as much as possible the amount
of reflected power.
The radiation efficiency is the ratio of the radiated power to the power
delivered to antenna input: the efficiency is a measure of how well an
antenna receives or transmits.
The radiation efficiency of the antenna connected to the ANT2 port
needs to be enough high over the operating frequency range to
comply with the Over-The-Air (OTA) radiated performance
requirements, as the TIS, specified by applicable related certification
schemes.
Table 8: Summary of secondary Rx antenna RF interface (ANT2) requirements
Item
Requirements
Remarks
Efficiency
imbalance
< 0.5 dB recommended
< 1.0 dB acceptable
Envelope
Correlation
Coefficient
< 0.4 recommended
< 0.5 acceptable
Isolation
> 15 dB recommended
> 10 dB acceptable
The radiation efficiency imbalance is the ratio of the primary (ANT1)
antenna efficiency to the secondary (ANT2) antenna efficiency: the
efficiency imbalance is a measure of how much better an antenna
receives or transmits compared to the other antenna.
The radiation efficiency of the secondary antenna needs to be roughly
the same of the radiation efficiency of the primary antenna for good
RF performance.
The Envelope Correlation Coefficient (ECC) between the primary
(ANT1) and the secondary (ANT2) antenna is an indicator of 3D
radiation pattern similarity between the two antennas: low ECC results
from antenna patterns with radiation lobes in different directions.
The ECC between primary and secondary antenna needs to be enough
low to comply with radiated performance requirements specified by
related certification schemes.
The antenna to antenna isolation is the loss between the primary
(ANT1) and the secondary (ANT2) antenna: high isolation results from
low coupled antennas.
The isolation between primary and secondary antenna needs to be
high for good RF performance.
Table 9: Summary of primary (ANT1) and secondary (ANT2) antennas relationship requirements
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 34 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.7.2
Antenna detection interface (ANT_DET)
The antenna detection is based on ADC measurement. The ANT_DET pin is an Analog to Digital Converter
(ADC) provided to sense the antenna presence.
The antenna detection function provided by ANT_DET pin is an optional feature that can be implemented if the
application requires it. The antenna detection is forced by the +UANTR AT command. See the u-blox AT
Commands Manual [2] for more details on this feature.
The ANT_DET pin generates a DC current (for detailed characteristics see the TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1]) and
measures the resulting DC voltage, thus determining the resistance from the antenna connector provided on the
application board to GND. So, the requirements to achieve antenna detection functionality are the following:

an RF antenna assembly with a built-in resistor (diagnostic circuit) must be used

an antenna detection circuit must be implemented on the application board
See section 2.4.2 for antenna detection circuit on application board and diagnostic circuit on antenna assembly
design-in guidelines.
1.8
1.8.1
SIM interface
SIM interface
TOBY-R2 series modules provide high-speed SIM/ME interface including automatic detection and configuration
of the voltage required by the connected SIM card or chip.
Both 1.8 V and 3 V SIM types are supported. Activation and deactivation with automatic voltage switch from
1.8 V to 3 V are implemented, according to ISO-IEC 7816-3 specifications. The VSIM supply output provides
internal short circuit protection to limit start-up current and protect the SIM to short circuits.
The SIM driver supports the PPS (Protocol and Parameter Selection) procedure for baud-rate selection, according
to the values determined by the SIM card or chip.
1.8.2
SIM detection interface
The GPIO5 pin is by default configured to detect the external SIM card mechanical / physical presence. The pin is
configured as input, and it can sense SIM card presence as intended to be properly connected to the mechanical
switch of a SIM card holder as described in section 2.5:

Low logic level at GPIO5 input pin is recognized as SIM card not present

High logic level at GPIO5 input pin is recognized as SIM card present
The SIM card detection function provided by GPIO5 pin is an optional feature that can be implemented / used or
not according to the application requirements: an Unsolicited Result Code (URC) is generated each time that
there is a change of status (for more details see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +UGPIOC, +CIND, +CMER).
The optional function “SIM card hot insertion/removal” can be additionally configured on the GPIO5 pin by
specific AT command (see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +UDCONF=50), in order to enable / disable the
SIM interface upon detection of external SIM card physical insertion / removal.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 35 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.9
Data communication interfaces
TOBY-R2 series modules provide the following serial communication interface:

UART interface: Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter serial interface available for the communication
with a host application processor (AT commands, data communication, FW update by means of FOAT), for
FW update by means of the u-blox EasyFlash tool and for diagnostic. (see section 1.9.1)

USB interface: Universal Serial Bus 2.0 compliant interface available for the communication with a host
application processor (AT commands, data communication, FW update by means of the FOAT feature), for
FW update by means of the u-blox EasyFlash tool and for diagnostic. (see section 1.9.2)

DDC interface: I C bus compatible interface available for the communication with u-blox GNSS positioning
chips or modules and with external I C devices as an audio codec. (see section 1.9.3)

SDIO interface: Secure Digital Input Output interface available for the communication with compatible
u-blox short range radio communication Wi-Fi modules. (see section 1.9.4)
1.9.1
UART interface
1.9.1.1 UART features
The UART interface is a 9-wire 1.8 V unbalanced asynchronous serial interface available on all the TOBY-R2 series
modules, supporting:

AT command mode

Data mode and Online command mode

Multiplexer protocol functionality (see 1.9.1.5)

FW upgrades by means of the FOAT feature (see 1.13.13 and Firmware Update Application Note [5])

FW upgrades by means of the u-blox EasyFlash tool (see Firmware Update Application Note [5])

Trace log capture (diagnostic purpose)
UART interface provides RS-232 functionality conforming to the ITU-T V.24 Recommendation [7], with CMOS
compatible signal levels: 0 V for low data bit or ON state, and 1.8 V for high data bit or OFF state (for detailed
electrical characteristics see TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1]), providing:

data lines (RXD as output, TXD as input),

hardware flow control lines (CTS as output, RTS as input),

modem status and control lines (DTR as input, DSR as output, DCD as output, RI as output).
TOBY-R2 series modules are designed to operate as cellular modems, i.e. as the data circuit-terminating
equipment (DCE) according to the ITU-T V.24 Recommendation [7]. A host application processor connected to
the module through the UART interface represents the data terminal equipment (DTE).
UART signal names of the cellular modules conform to the ITU-T V.24 Recommendation [7]: e.g. TXD line
represents data transmitted by the DTE (host processor output) and received by the DCE (module input).
TOBY-R2 series modules’ UART interface is by default configured in AT command mode: the module waits for
AT command instructions and interprets all the characters received as commands to execute. All the
functionalities supported by TOBY-R2 series modules can be in general set and configured by AT commands:

AT commands according to 3GPP TS 27.007 [8], 3GPP TS 27.005 [9], 3GPP TS 27.010 [10]

u-blox AT commands (for the complete list and syntax see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2])
For the definition of the interface data mode, command mode and online command mode see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 36 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Flow control handshakes are supported by the UART interface and can be set by appropriate AT commands (see
u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], &K, +IFC, \Q AT commands): hardware flow control (over the RTS / CTS lines),
software flow control (XON/XOFF), or none flow control.
Hardware flow control is enabled by default.
The one-shot autobauding is supported: the automatic baud rate detection is performed only once, at module
start up. After the detection, the module works at the detected baud rate and the baud rate can only be
changed by AT command (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [3], +IPR).
One-shot automatic baud rate recognition (autobauding) is enabled by default.
The following baud rates can be configured by AT command (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +IPR):

9600 b/s

19200 b/s

38400 b/s

57600 b/s

115200 b/s, default value when one-shot autobauding is disabled

230400 b/s

460800 b/s

921600 b/s

3000000 b/s

3250000 b/s

6000000 b/s
Baud rates higher than 460800 b/s cannot be automatically detected by TOBY-R2 series modules.
The modules support the one-shot automatic frame recognition in conjunction with the one-shot autobauding.
The following frame formats can be configured by AT command (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +ICF):

8N1 (8 data bits, No parity, 1 stop bit), default frame configuration with fixed baud rate, see Figure 17

8E1 (8 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit)

8O1 (8 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit)

8N2 (8 data bits, No parity, 2 stop bits)

7E1 (7 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit)

7O1 (7 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit)
Normal Transfer, 8N1
Start of 1-Byte
transfer
D0
D1
Possible Start of
next transfer
D2
D3
D4
D5
Start Bit
(Always 0)
D6
D7
Stop Bit
(Always 1)
tbit = 1/(Baudrate)
Figure 17: Description of UART 8N1 frame format (8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit)
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 37 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.9.1.2
UART interface configuration
The UART interface of TOBY-R2 series modules is available as AT command interface with the default
configuration described in Table 10 (for more details and information about further settings, see the u-blox AT
Commands Manual [2]).
Interface
AT Settings
Comments
UART interface
AT interface: enabled
AT command interface is enabled by default on the UART physical interface
AT+IPR=0
One-shot autobauding enabled by default on the modules
AT+ICF=3,1
8N1 frame format enabled by default
AT&K3
HW flow control enabled by default
AT&S1
DSR line (Circuit 107 in ITU-T V.24) set ON in data mode6 and set OFF in command mode6
AT&D1
Upon an ON-to-OFF transition of DTR line (Circuit 108/2 in ITU-T V.24), the module (DCE)
enters online command mode6 and issues an OK result code
AT&C1
DCD line (Circuit 109 in ITU-T V.24) changes in accordance with the Carrier detect status; ON
if the Carrier is detected, OFF otherwise
MUX protocol: disabled
Multiplexing mode is disabled by default and it can be enabled by AT+CMUX command. For
more details, see the Mux Implementation Application Note [11].
The following virtual channels are defined:

Channel 0: control channel

Channel 1 – 5: AT commands / data connection

Channel 6: GNSS tunneling7
Table 10: Default UART interface configuration
1.9.1.3
UART signals behavior
At the module switch-on, before the UART interface initialization (as described in the power-on sequence
reported in Figure 14), each pin is first tri-stated and then is set to its relative internal reset state . At the end of
the boot sequence, the UART interface is initialized, the module is by default in active-mode, and the UART
interface is enabled as AT commands interface.
The configuration and the behavior of the UART signals after the boot sequence are described below. See
section 1.4 for definition and description of module operating modes referred to in this section.
RXD signal behavior
The module data output line (RXD) is set by default to the OFF state (high level) at UART initialization. The
module holds RXD in the OFF state until the module does not transmit some data.
TXD signal behavior
The module data input line (TXD) is set by default to the OFF state (high level) at UART initialization. The TXD
line is then held by the module in the OFF state if the line is not activated by the DTE: an active pull-up is enabled
inside the module on the TXD input.
For the definition of the interface data mode, command mode and online command mode see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]
Not supported by “02” product versions
See the pin description table in the TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1]
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 38 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
CTS signal behavior
The module hardware flow control output (CTS line) is set to the ON state (low level) at UART initialization.
If the hardware flow control is enabled, as it is by default, the CTS line indicates when the UART interface is
enabled (data can be received): the module drives the CTS line to the ON state or to the OFF state when it is
either able or not able to accept data from the DTE over the UART (for example see section 1.9.1.4, Figure 20).
If hardware flow control is enabled, then when the CTS line is OFF it does not necessarily mean that the
module is in low power idle-mode, but only that the UART is not enabled, as the module could be forced
to stay in active-mode for other activities, e.g. related to the network or related to other interfaces.
If hardware flow control is enabled and the multiplexer protocol is active, then the CTS line state is
mapped to FCon / FCoff MUX command for flow control matters outside the power saving configuration
while the physical CTS line is still used as a UART power state indicator (see Mux Application Note [11]).
The CTS hardware flow control setting can be changed by AT commands (for more details, see the u-blox AT
Commands Manual [2], AT&K, AT\Q, AT+IFC AT commands).
When the power saving configuration is enabled by AT+UPSV command and the hardware flow-control is
not implemented in the DTE/DCE connection, data sent by the DTE can be lost: the first character sent
when the module is in low power idle-mode will not be a valid communication character (see section
1.9.1.4 and in particular the sub-section “Wake up via data reception” for further details).
RTS signal behavior
The hardware flow control input (RTS line) is set by default to the OFF state (high level) at UART initialization.
The module then holds the RTS line in the OFF state if the line is not activated by the DTE: an active pull-up is
enabled inside the module on the RTS input.
If the HW flow control is enabled, as it is by default, the module monitors the RTS line to detect permission from
the DTE to send data to the DTE itself. If the RTS line is set to the OFF state, any on-going data transmission
from the module is interrupted until the RTS line changes to the ON state.
The DTE must still be able to accept a certain number of characters after the RTS line is set to the OFF
state: the module guarantees the transmission interruption within two characters from RTS state change.
The module behavior according to the RTS hardware flow control status can be configured by AT commands
(for more details, see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], AT&K, AT\Q, AT+IFC AT commands).
If AT+UPSV=2 is set and HW flow control is disabled, the module monitors the RTS line to manage the power
saving configuration (for more details, see section 1.9.1.4 and u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], AT+UPSV):

When an OFF-to-ON transition occurs on the RTS input, the UART is enabled and the module is forced to
active-mode. After ~20 ms, the switch is completed and data can be received without loss. The module
cannot enter low power idle-mode and the UART is enabled as long as the RTS is in the ON state

If the RTS input line is set to the OFF state by the DTE, the UART is disabled (held in low power mode) and
the module automatically enters low power idle-mode whenever possible
DSR signal behavior
If AT&S1 is set, as it is by default, the DSR module output line is set by default to the OFF state (high level) at
UART initialization. The DSR line is then set to the OFF state when the module is in command mode or in online
command mode and is set to the ON state when the module is in data mode .
If AT&S0 is set, the DSR module output line is set by default to the ON state (low level) at UART initialization and
is then always held in the ON state.
For the definition of the interface data mode, command mode and online command mode see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 39 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
DTR signal behavior
The DTR module input line is set by default to the OFF state (high level) at UART initialization. The module then
holds the DTR line in the OFF state if the line is not activated by the DTE: an active pull-up is enabled inside the
module on the DTR input.
Module behavior according to DTR status can be changed by AT command configuration (for more details see
the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], &D AT command description).
If AT+UPSV=3 is set, the DTR line is monitored by the module to manage the power saving configuration (for
more details, see section 1.9.1.4 and u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], AT+UPSV):

When an OFF-to-ON transition occurs on the DTR input, the UART is enabled and the module is forced to
active-mode. After ~20 ms, the switch is completed and data can be received without loss. The module
cannot enter low power idle-mode and the UART is enabled as long as the DTR is in the ON state

If the DTR input line is set to the OFF state by the DTE, the UART is disabled (held in low power mode) and
the module automatically enters low power idle-mode whenever possible
DCD signal behavior
If AT&C1 is set, as it is by default, the DCD module output line is set by default to the OFF state (high level) at
UART initialization. The module then sets the DCD line according to the carrier detect status: ON if the carrier is
detected, OFF otherwise.
In case of voice calls, DCD is set to the ON state when the call is established.
In case of data calls, there are the following scenarios regarding the DCD signal behavior:

Packet Switched Data call: Before activating the PPP protocol (data mode) a dial-up application must
provide the ATD*99***# to the module: with this command the module switches from
command mode to data mode and can accept PPP packets. The module sets the DCD line to the ON state,
then answers with a CONNECT to confirm the ATD*99 command. The DCD ON is not related to the context
activation but with the data mode

Circuit Switched Data call: To establish a data call, the DTE can send the ATD command to the
module which sets an outgoing data call to a remote modem (or another data module). Data can be
transparent (non reliable) or non transparent (with the reliable RLP protocol). When the remote DCE accepts
the data call, the module DCD line is set to ON and the CONNECT  string is
returned by the module. At this stage the DTE can send characters through the serial line to the data
module which sends them through the network to the remote DCE attached to a remote DTE
The DCD is set to ON during the execution of the +CMGS, +CMGW, +USOWR, +USODL AT commands
requiring input data from the DTE: the DCD line is set to the ON state as soon as the switch to binary/text
input mode is completed and the prompt is issued; DCD line is set to OFF as soon as the input mode is
interrupted or completed (for more details see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]).
10
The DCD line is kept in the ON state, even during the online command mode , to indicate that the data
10
call is still established even if suspended, while if the module enters command mode , the DSR line is set
to the OFF state. For more details see DSR signal behavior description.
For scenarios when the DCD line setting is requested for different reasons (e.g. SMS texting during online
10
command mode ), the DCD line changes to guarantee the correct behavior for all the scenarios. For
10
example, in case of SMS texting in online command mode , if the data call is released, DCD is kept ON till
the SMS command execution is completed (even if the data call release would request DCD set OFF).
If AT&C0 is set, the DCD module output line is set by default to the ON state (low level) at UART initialization
and is then always held in the ON state.
10
For the definition of the interface data mode, command mode and online command mode see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 40 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
RI signal behavior
The RI module output line is set by default to the OFF state (high level) at UART initialization.
The RI line can notify an incoming call: the RI line is switched from the OFF state to the ON state with a 4:1 duty
cycle and a 5 s period (ON for 1 s, OFF for 4 s, see Figure 18), until the DTE attached to the module sends the
ATA string and the module accepts the incoming data call. The RING string sent by the module (DCE) to the
serial port at constant time intervals is not correlated with the switch of the RI line to the ON state.
1s
RI OFF
RI ON
10
15
time [s]
Call incomes
Figure 18: RI behavior during an incoming call
The RI output line can notify an SMS arrival. When the SMS arrives, the RI line switches from OFF to ON for 1 s
(see Figure 19), if the feature is enabled by AT+CNMI command (see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]).
1s
RI OFF
RI ON
time [s]
SMS arrives
Figure 19: RI behavior at SMS arrival
This behavior allows the DTE to stay in power saving mode until the DCE related event requests service.
For SMS arrival, if several events coincidently occur or in quick succession each event independently triggers the
RI line, although the line will not be deactivated between each event. As a result, the RI line may stay to ON for
more than 1 s, if an incoming call is answered within less than 1 s (with ATA or if auto-answering is set to
ATS0=1) than the RI line is set to OFF earlier, so that:
RI line monitoring cannot be used by the DTE to determine the number of received SMSes.
For multiple events (incoming call plus SMS received), the RI line cannot be used to discriminate the two
events, but the DTE must rely on subsequent URCs and interrogate the DCE with the proper commands.
The RI line can additionally notify all the URCs and/or all the incoming data in PPP and Direct Link connections, if
the feature is enabled by the AT+URING command (for more details see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]):
the RI line is asserted when one of the configured events occur and it remains asserted for 1 s unless another
configured event will happen, with the same behavior described in Figure 19.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 41 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.9.1.4 UART and power-saving
The power saving configuration is controlled by the AT+UPSV command (for the complete description, see the
u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]). When power saving is enabled, the module automatically enters low power
idle-mode whenever possible, and otherwise the active-mode is maintained by the module (see section 1.4 for
definition and description of module operating modes referred to in this section).
The AT+UPSV command configures both the module power saving and also the UART behavior in relation to the
power saving. The conditions for the module entering low power idle-mode also depend on the UART power
saving configuration, as the module does not enter the low power idle-mode according to any required activity
related to the network (within or outside an active call) or any other required concurrent activity related to the
functions and interfaces of the module, including the UART interface.
The AT+UPSV command can set these different power saving configurations:

AT+UPSV=0, power saving disabled (default configuration)

AT+UPSV=1, power saving enabled cyclically

AT+UPSV=2, power saving enabled and controlled by the UART RTS input line

AT+UPSV=3, power saving enabled and controlled by the UART DTR input line
The different power saving configurations that can be set by the +UPSV AT command are described in details in
the following subsections. Table 11 summarizes the UART interface communication process in the different
power saving configurations, in relation with the hardware flow control settings and the RTS input line status.
For more details on the +UPSV AT command description, see u-blox AT commands Manual [2].
AT+UPSV HW flow control
RTS line
DTR line
Communication during idle-mode and wake up
Enabled (AT&K3)
ON
ON or OFF
Data sent by the DTE is correctly received by the module.
Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE.
Enabled (AT&K3)
OFF
ON or OFF
Disabled (AT&K0)
ON or OFF
ON or OFF
Enabled (AT&K3)
ON
ON or OFF
Data sent by the DTE is correctly received by the module.
Data sent by the module is buffered by the module and will be correctly
received by the DTE when it is ready to receive data (i.e. RTS line will be ON).
Data sent by the DTE is correctly received by the module.
Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE if it is ready to receive
data, otherwise the data is lost.
Data sent by the DTE is buffered by the DTE and will be correctly received by
the module when it is ready to receive data (when the UART is enabled).
Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE.
Enabled (AT&K3)
OFF
ON or OFF
Data sent by the DTE is buffered by the DTE and will be correctly received by
the module when it is ready to receive data (when the UART is enabled).
Data sent by the module is buffered by the module and will be correctly
received by the DTE when it is ready to receive data (i.e. RTS line will be ON).
Disabled (AT&K0)
ON or OFF
ON or OFF
The first character sent by the DTE is lost by the module, but after ~20 ms the
UART and the module are woken up: recognition of subsequent characters is
guaranteed only after the UART / module complete wake-up (after ~20 ms).
Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE if it is ready to receive
data, otherwise the data is lost.
Enabled (AT&K3)
Disabled (AT&K0)
ON or OFF
ON
ON or OFF
ON or OFF
Disabled (AT&K0)
OFF
ON or OFF
Not Applicable: HW flow control cannot be enabled with AT+UPSV=2.
Data sent by the DTE is correctly received by the module.
Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE if it is ready to receive
data, otherwise data is lost.
Data sent by the DTE is lost by the module.
Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE if it is ready to receive
data, otherwise data is lost.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 42 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
AT+UPSV HW flow control
RTS line
DTR line
Communication during idle-mode and wake up
Enabled (AT&K3)
ON
ON
Enabled (AT&K3)
ON
OFF
Data sent by the DTE is correctly received by the module.
Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE.
Data sent by the DTE is lost by the module.
Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE.
Enabled (AT&K3)
OFF
ON
Enabled (AT&K3)
OFF
OFF
Disabled (AT&K0)
ON or OFF
ON
Disabled (AT&K0)
ON or OFF
OFF
Data sent by the DTE is correctly received by the module.
Data sent by the module is buffered by the module and will be correctly
received by the DTE when it is ready to receive data (i.e. RTS line will be ON).
Data sent by the DTE is lost by the module.
Data sent by the module is buffered by the module and will be correctly
received by the DTE when it is ready to receive data (i.e. RTS line will be ON).
Data sent by the DTE is correctly received by the module.
Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE if it is ready to receive
data, otherwise data is lost.
Data sent by the DTE is lost by the module.
Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE if it is ready to receive
data, otherwise data is lost.
Table 11: UART and power-saving summary
AT+UPSV=0: power saving disabled, fixed active-mode
The module does not enter low power idle-mode and the UART interface is enabled (data can be sent and
received): the CTS line is always held in the ON state after UART initialization. This is the default configuration.
AT+UPSV=1: power saving enabled, cyclic idle/active-mode
When the AT+UPSV=1 command is issued by the DTE, the UART will be normally disabled, and then periodically
or upon necessity enabled as following:

During the periodic UART wake up to receive or send data, also according to the module wake up for the
paging reception (see section 1.5.1.5) or other activities

If the module needs to transmit some data (e.g. URC), the UART is temporarily enabled to send data

If the DTE send data with HW flow control disabled, the first character sent causes the UART and module
wake-up after ~20 ms: recognition of subsequent characters is guaranteed only after the complete wake-up
(see the following subsection “wake up via data reception”)
The module automatically enters the low power idle-mode whenever possible but it wakes up to active-mode
according to the UART periodic wake up so that the module cyclically enters the low power idle-mode and the
active-mode. Additionally, the module wakes up to active-mode according to any required activity related to the
network (e.g. for the periodic paging reception described in section 1.5.1.5, or for any other required RF Tx / Rx)
or any other required activity related to module functions / interfaces (including the UART itself).
When the UART interface is enabled, data can be received. When a character is received, it forces the UART
interface to stay enabled for a longer time and it forces the module to stay in the active-mode for a longer time,
according to the timeout configured by the second parameter of the +UPSV AT command. The timeout can be
set from 40 2G-frames (i.e. 40 x 4.615 ms = 184 ms) up to 65000 2G-frames (i.e. 65000 x 4.615 ms = 300 s).
Default value is 2000 2G-frames (i.e. 2000 x 4.615 ms = 9.2 s). Every subsequent character received during the
active-mode, resets and restarts the timer; hence the active-mode duration can be extended indefinitely.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 43 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
The CTS output line is driven to the ON or OFF state when the module is either able or not able to accept data
from the DTE over the UART: Figure 20 illustrates the CTS output line toggling due to paging reception and data
received over the UART, with AT+UPSV=1 configuration.
Data input
CTS OFF
CTS ON
time [s]
~9.2 s (default)
Figure 20: CTS output pin indicates when module’s UART is enabled (CTS = ON = low level) or disabled (CTS = OFF = high level)
AT+UPSV=2: power saving enabled and controlled by the RTS line
This configuration can only be enabled with the module hardware flow control disabled (i.e. AT&K0 setting).
The UART interface is disabled after the DTE sets the RTS line to OFF.
Afterwards, the UART is enabled again, and the module does not enter low power idle-mode, as following:

If an OFF-to-ON transition occurs on the RTS input, this causes the UART / module wake-up after ~20 ms:
recognition of subsequent characters is guaranteed only after the complete wake-up, and the UART is kept
enabled as long as the RTS input line is set to ON.

If the module needs to transmit some data (e.g. URC), the UART is temporarily enabled to send data
The module automatically enters the low power idle-mode whenever possible but it wakes up to active-mode
according to any required activity related to the network (e.g. for the periodic paging reception described in
section 1.5.1.5, or for any other required RF transmission / reception) or any other required activity related to the
module functions / interfaces (including the UART itself).
AT+UPSV=3: power saving enabled and controlled by the DTR line
The UART interface is disabled after the DTE sets the DTR line to OFF.
Afterwards, the UART is enabled again, and the module does not enter low power idle-mode, as following:

If an OFF-to-ON transition occurs on the DTR input, this causes the UART / module wake-up after ~20 ms:
recognition of subsequent characters is guaranteed only after the complete wake-up, and the UART is kept
enabled as long as the DTR input line is set to ON

If the module needs to transmit some data (e.g. URC), the UART is temporarily enabled to send data
The module automatically enters the low power idle-mode whenever possible but it wakes up to active-mode
according to any required activity related to the network (e.g. for the periodic paging reception described in
section 1.5.1.5, or for any other required RF signal transmission or reception) or any other required activity
related to the functions / interfaces of the module.
The AT+UPSV=3 configuration can be enabled regardless the flow control setting on UART. In particular, the HW
flow control can be enabled (AT&K3) or disabled (AT&K0) on UART during this configuration. In both cases, with
the AT+UPSV=3 configuration, the CTS line indicates when the module is either able or not able to accept data
from the DTE over the UART.
When the AT+UPSV=3 configuration is enabled, the DTR input line can still be used by the DTE to control the
module behavior according to AT&D command configuration (see u-blox AT commands Manual [2]).
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 44 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Wake up via data reception
The UART wake up via data reception consists of a special configuration of the module TXD input line that
causes the system wake-up when a low-to-high transition occurs on the TXD input line. In particular, the UART
is enabled and the module switches from the low power idle-mode to active-mode within ~20 ms from the first
character received: this is the system “wake up time”.
As a consequence, the first character sent by the DTE when the UART is disabled (i.e. the wake up character) is
not a valid communication character even if the wake up via data reception configuration is active, because it
cannot be recognized, and the recognition of the subsequent characters is guaranteed only after the complete
system wake-up (i.e. after ~20 ms).
The TXD input line is configured to wake up the system via data reception in the following case:

AT+UPSV=1 is set with HW flow control disabled
Figure 21 and Figure 22 show examples of common scenarios and timing constraints:

AT+UPSV=1 power saving configuration is active and the timeout from last data received to idle-mode start
is set to 2000 frames (AT+UPSV=1,2000)

Hardware flow control is disabled
Figure 21 shows the case where the module UART is disabled and only a wake-up is forced. In this scenario the
only character sent by the DTE is the wake-up character; as a consequence, the DCE module UART is disabled
when the timeout from last data received expires (2000 frames without data reception, as the default case).
UART
DCE UART is enabled for 2000 GSM frames (~9.2 s)
OFF
ON
time
TXD input
Wake up time: ~20 ms
OFF
ON
Wake up character
Not recognized by DCE
time
Figure 21: Wake-up via data reception without further communication
Figure 22 shows the case where in addition to the wake-up character further (valid) characters are sent. The
wake up character wakes-up the module UART. The other characters must be sent after the “wake up time” of
~20 ms. If this condition is satisfied, the module (DCE) recognizes characters. The module will disable the UART
after 2000 GSM frames from the latest data reception.
UART
DCE UART is enabled for 2000 GSM frames (~9.2s)
after the last data received
OFF
ON
TXD input
Wake up time: ~20 ms
time
OFF
ON
Wake up character
Not recognized by DCE
Valid characters
Recognized by DCE
time
Figure 22: Wake-up via data reception with further communication
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 45 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
The “wake-up via data reception” feature cannot be disabled.
11
In command mode , with “wake-up via data reception” enabled and autobauding enabled, the DTE
should always send a dummy character to the module before the “AT” prefix set at the beginning of each
command line: the first dummy character is ignored if the module is in active-mode, or it represents the
wake-up character if the module is in low power idle-mode.
11
In command mode , with “wake-up via data reception” enabled and autobauding disabled, the DTE
should always send a dummy “AT” to the module before each command line: the first dummy “AT” is
not ignored if the module is in active-mode (i.e. the module replies “OK”), or it represents the wake up
character if the module is in low power idle-mode (i.e. the module does not reply).
Additional considerations
If the USB is connected and not suspended, the module is kept ready to communicate over USB regardless the
AT+UPSV settings, which have instead effect on the UART behavior, as they configure the UART power saving,
so that UART is enabled / disabled according to the AT+UPSV settings.
To set the AT+UPSV=1, AT+UPSV=2 or AT+UPSV=3 configuration over the USB interface, the autobauding must
be previously disabled on the UART by the +IPR AT command over the used USB AT interface, and this +IPR AT
command configuration must be saved in the module’ non-volatile memory (see the u-blox AT Commands
Manual [2]). Then, after the subsequent module re-boot, AT+UPSV=1, AT+UPSV=2 or AT+UPSV=3 can be issued
over the used USB AT interface: all the AT profiles are updated accordingly.
1.9.1.5
UART multiplexer protocol
TOBY-R2 series modules include multiplexer functionality as per 3GPP TS 27.010 [10], on the UART physical link.
This is a data link protocol which uses HDLC-like framing and operates between the module (DCE) and the
application processor (DTE) and allows a number of simultaneous sessions over the used physical link (UART): the
user can concurrently use AT interface on one MUX channel and data communication on another MUX channel.
The following virtual channels are defined (for more details, see Mux implementation Application Note [11]):

Channel 0: Multiplexer control

Channel 1 – 5: AT commands / data connection

Channel 6: GNSS data tunneling
The GNSS data tunneling channel is not supported by “02” product versions.
11
See the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2] for the definition of the interface data mode, command mode and online command mode.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 46 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.9.2
USB interface
1.9.2.1
USB features
TOBY-R2 series modules include a High-Speed USB 2.0 compliant interface with 480 Mb/s maximum data rate,
representing the main interface for transferring high speed data with a host application processor, supporting:

AT command mode

Data mode and Online command mode

FW upgrades by means of the FOAT feature (see 1.13.13 and Firmware Update Application Note [5])

FW upgrades by means of the u-blox EasyFlash tool (see Firmware Update Application Note [5])

Trace log capture (diagnostic purpose)
12
12
The module itself acts as a USB device and can be connected to a USB host such as a Personal Computer or an
embedded application microprocessor equipped with compatible drivers.
The USB_D+/USB_D- lines carry USB serial bus data and signaling according to the Universal Serial Bus Revision
2.0 specification [6], while the VUSB_DET input pin senses the VBUS USB supply presence (nominally 5 V at the
source) to detect the host connection and enable the interface.
The USB interface of the module is enabled only if a valid voltage is detected by the VUSB_DET input (see the
TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1]). Neither the USB interface, nor the whole module is supplied by the VUSB_DET
input: the VUSB_DET senses the USB supply voltage and absorbs few microamperes.
The USB interface is controlled and operated with:

AT commands according to 3GPP TS 27.007 [8], 3GPP TS 27.005 [9], 3GPP TS 27.010 [10]

u-blox AT commands (for the complete list and syntax see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2])
The USB interface of TOBY-R2 series modules, according to the configured USB profile, can provide different
USB functions with various capabilities and purposes, such as:

CDC-ACM for AT commands and data communication

CDC-ACM for GNSS tunneling

CDC-ACM for SAP (SIM Access Profile)

CDC-ACM for Diagnostic log

CDC-NCM for Ethernet-over-USB
CDC-ACM for GNSS tunneling, CDC-ACM for SAP, and CDC-NCM for Ethernet-over-USB are not
supported by “02” product versions.
The USB profile of TOBY-R2 series modules identifies itself by its VID (Vendor ID) and PID (Product ID)
combination, included in the USB device descriptor according to the USB 2.0 specifications [6].
If the USB is connected to the host before the module is switched on, or if the module is reset (rebooted) with
the USB connected to the host, the VID and PID are automatically updated during the boot of the module. First,
VID and PID are the following:

VID = 0x8087

PID = 0x0716
This VID and PID combination identifies a USB profile where no USB function described above is available: AT
commands must not be sent to the module over the USB profile identified by this VID and PID combination.
12
For the definition of the interface data mode, command mode and online command mode see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 47 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Then, after a time period (which depends on the host / device enumeration timings), the VID and PID are
updated to the ones related to the default USB profile providing the following set of USB functions:

6 CDC-ACM modem COM ports enumerated as follows:
USB1: AT and data
USB2: AT and data
USB3: AT and data
USB4: GNSS tunneling
USB5: SAP (SIM Access Profile)
USB6: Primary Log (diagnostic purpose)
VID and PID of this USB profile with the set of functions described above (6 CDC-ACM) are the following:

VID = 0x1546

PID = 0x1107
Figure 23 summarizes the USB end-points available with the default USB profile.
Default profile configuration
Function AT and Data
Interface 0
Abstract Control Model
EndPoint
Transfer: Interrupt
EndPoint
Transfer: Bulk
EndPoint
Transfer: Bulk
Interface 1
Function AT and Data
Data
Interface 2
Abstract Control Model
EndPoint
Transfer: Interrupt
EndPoint
Transfer: Bulk
EndPoint
Transfer: Bulk
Interface 3
Function AT and Data
Data
Interface 4
Abstract Control Model
EndPoint
Transfer: Interrupt
EndPoint
Transfer: Bulk
EndPoint
Transfer: Bulk
Interface 5
Function GNSS tunneling
Data
Interface 6
Abstract Control Model
EndPoint
Transfer: Interrupt
EndPoint
Transfer: Bulk
EndPoint
Transfer: Bulk
Interface 7
Function SAP
Data
Interface 8
Abstract Control Model
EndPoint
Transfer: Interrupt
EndPoint
Transfer: Bulk
EndPoint
Transfer: Bulk
Interface 9
Function Primary Log
Data
Interface 10
Abstract Control Model
EndPoint
Transfer: Interrupt
EndPoint
Transfer: Bulk
EndPoint
Transfer: Bulk
Interface 11
Data
Figure 23: TOBY-R2 series USB End-Points summary for the default USB profile configuration
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 48 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.9.2.2 USB in Windows
USB drivers are provided for Windows operating system platforms and should be properly installed / enabled by
following the step-by-step instructions available in the EVK-R2xx User Guide [3] or in the Windows Embedded
OS USB Driver Installation Application Note [4].
USB drivers are available for the following operating system platforms:

Windows 7

Windows 8

Windows 8.1

Windows 10

Windows Embedded CE 6.0

Windows Embedded Compact 7

Windows Embedded Compact 2013
The module firmware can be upgraded over the USB interface by means of the FOAT feature, or using the u-blox
EasyFlash tool (for more details see Firmware Update Application Note [5]).
1.9.2.3
USB in Linux/Android
It is not required to install a specific driver for each Linux-based or Android-based operating system (OS) to use
the module USB interface, which is compatible with standard Linux/Android USB kernel drivers.
The full capability and configuration of the module USB interface can be reported by running “lsusb –v” or an
equivalent command available in the host operating system when the module is connected.
1.9.2.4
USB and power saving
The modules automatically enter the USB suspended state when the device has observed no bus traffic for a
specific time period according to the USB 2.0 specification [6]. In suspended state, the module maintains any
USB internal status as device. In addition, the module enters the suspended state when the hub port it is
attached to is disabled. This is referred to as USB selective suspend.
If the USB is suspended and a power saving configuration is enabled by the AT+UPSV command, the module
automatically enters the low power idle-mode whenever possible but it wakes up to active-mode according to
any required activity related to the network (e.g. the periodic paging reception described in section 1.5.1.5) or
any other required activity related to the functions / interfaces of the module.
The USB exits suspend mode when there is bus activity. If the USB is connected and not suspended, the module
is kept ready to communicate over USB regardless the AT+UPSV settings, therefore the AT+UPSV settings are
overruled but they have effect on the power saving configuration of the other interfaces (see 1.9.1.4).
The modules are capable of USB remote wake-up signaling: i.e. it may request the host to exit suspend mode or
selective suspend by using electrical signaling to indicate remote wake-up, for example due to incoming call,
URCs, data reception on a socket. The remote wake-up signaling notifies the host that it should resume from its
suspended mode, if necessary, and service the external event. Remote wake-up is accomplished using electrical
signaling described in the USB 2.0 specifications [6].
For the module current consumption description with power saving enabled and USB suspended, or with power
saving disabled and USB not suspended, see the sections 1.5.1.5, 1.5.1.6 and the TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1].
The additional VUSB_DET input pin available on TOBY-R2 series modules provides the complete bus detach
functionality: the modules disable the USB interface when a low logic level is sensed after a high-to-low logic
level transition on the VUSB_DET input pin. This allows a further reduction of the module current consumption,
in particular as compared to the USB suspended status during low-power idle mode with power saving enabled.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 49 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
DDC (I2C) interface
1.9.3
Communication with u-blox GNSS receivers over I C bus compatible Display Data Channel interface,
®
AssistNow embedded GNSS positioning aiding, CellLocate positioning through cellular info, and custom
functions over GPIOs for the integration with u-blox positioning chips / modules are not supported by
TOBY-R2 series modules “02” product versions.
The SDA and SCL pins represent an I C bus compatible Display Data Channel (DDC) interface available for

communication with u-blox GNSS chips / modules,
 communication with other external I C devices as audio codecs.
The AT commands interface is not available on the DDC (I C) interface.
DDC (I C) slave-mode operation is not supported: the TOBY-R2 series module can act as I C master that can
communicate with more I C slaves in accordance to the I C bus specifications [12].
The DDC (I C) interface pins of the module, serial data (SDA) and serial clock (SCL), are open drain outputs
conforming to the I C bus specifications [12].
u-blox has implemented special features to ease the design effort required for the integration of a u-blox cellular
module with a u blox GNSS receiver.
Combining a u-blox cellular module with a u-blox GNSS receiver allows designers to have full access to the
positioning receiver directly via the cellular module: it relays control messages to the GNSS receiver via a
nd
dedicated DDC (I C) interface. A 2 interface connected to the positioning receiver is not necessary: AT
commands via the UART or USB serial interface of the cellular module allows a fully control of the GNSS receiver
from any host processor.
The modules feature embedded GNSS aiding that is a set of specific features developed by u-blox to enhance
GNSS performance, decreasing the Time To First Fix (TTFF), thus allowing to calculate the position in a shorter
time with higher accuracy.
These GNSS aiding types are available:

Local aiding

AssistNow Online

AssistNow Offline

AssistNow Autonomous
The embedded GNSS aiding features can be used only if the DDC (I C) interface of the cellular module is
connected to the u-blox GNSS receivers.
The cellular modules provide additional custom functions over GPIO pins to improve the integration with u-blox
positioning chips and modules. GPIO pins can handle:

GNSS receiver power-on/off: “GNSS supply enable” function provided by GPIO2 improves the positioning
receiver power consumption. When the GNSS functionality is not required, the positioning receiver can be
completely switched off by the cellular module that is controlled by AT commands

The wake up from idle-mode when the GNSS receiver is ready to send data: “GNSS Tx data ready” function
provided by GPIO3 improves the cellular module power consumption. When power saving is enabled in the
cellular module by the AT+UPSV command and the GNSS receiver does not send data by the DDC (I C)
interface, the module automatically enters idle-mode whenever possible. With the “GNSS Tx data ready”
function the GNSS receiver can indicate to the cellular module that it is ready to send data by the DDC (I C)
interface: the positioning receiver can wake up the cellular module if it is in idle-mode, so the cellular
module does not lose the data sent by the GNSS receiver even if power saving is enabled
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 50 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual

The RTC synchronization signal to the GNSS receiver: “GNSS RTC sharing” function provided by GPIO4
improves GNSS receiver performance, decreasing the Time To First Fix (TTFF), and thus allowing to calculate
the position in a shorter time with higher accuracy. When GPS local aiding is enabled, the cellular module
automatically uploads data such as position, time, ephemeris, almanac, health and ionospheric parameter
from the positioning receiver into its local memory, and restores this to the GNSS receiver at the next power
up of the positioning receiver
For more details regarding the handling of the DDC (I C) interface, the GNSS aiding features and the
GNSS related functions over GPIOs, see section 1.11, to the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2] (AT+UGPS,
AT+UGPRF, AT+UGPIOC AT commands) and the GNSS Implementation Application Note [13].
“GNSS Tx data ready” and “GNSS RTC sharing” functions are not supported by all u-blox GNSS receivers
HW or ROM/FW versions. Please see the GNSS Implementation Application Note [13] or to the Hardware
Integration Manual of the u-blox GNSS receivers for the supported features.
As additional improvement for the GNSS receiver performance, the V_BCKP supply output of the cellular
modules can be connected to the V_BCKP supply input pin of u-blox positioning chips and modules to provide
the supply for the GNSS real time clock and backup RAM when the VCC supply of the cellular module is within
its operating range and the VCC supply of the GNSS receiver is disabled.
This enables the u-blox positioning receiver to recover from a power breakdown with either a hot start or a
warm start (depending on the duration of the GNSS receiver VCC outage) and to maintain the configuration
settings saved in the backup RAM.
1.9.4
SDIO interface
Secure Digital Input Output interface is not supported by TOBY-R2 series modules “02” product versions.
TOBY-R2 series modules include a 4-bit Secure Digital Input Output interface (SDIO_D0, SDIO_D1, SDIO_D2,
SDIO_D3, SDIO_CLK, SDIO_CMD) designed to communicate with an external u-blox short range Wi-Fi module:
the cellular module acts as an SDIO host controller which can communicate over the SDIO bus with a compatible
u-blox short range radio communication Wi-Fi module acting as SDIO device.
The SDIO interface is the only one interface of TOBY-R2 series modules dedicated for communication between
the u-blox cellular module and the u-blox short range Wi-Fi module.
The AT commands interface is not available on the SDIO interface of TOBY-R2 series modules.
Combining a u-blox cellular module with a u-blox short range communication module gives designers full access
to the Wi-Fi module directly via the cellular module, so that a second interface connected to the Wi-Fi module is
not necessary. AT commands via the AT interfaces of the cellular module allows a full control of the Wi-Fi
module from any host processor, because Wi-Fi control messages are relayed to the Wi-Fi module via the
dedicated SDIO interface.
u-blox has implemented special features in the cellular modules to ease the design effort for the integration of a
u-blox cellular module with a u-blox short range Wi-Fi module to provide Router functionality.
Additional custom function over GPIO pins is designed to improve the integration with u-blox Wi-Fi modules:

Wi-Fi enable
Switch-on / switch-off the Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi enable function over GPIO is not supported by TOBY-R2 series modules “02” product versions.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 51 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.10 Audio
1.10.1 Digital audio over I2S interface
TOBY-R2 series modules include a 4-wire I S digital audio interface (I2S_TXD data output, I2S_RXD data input,
I2S_CLK clock input/output, I2S_WA world alignment / synchronization signal input/output), which can be
configured by AT command for digital audio communication with external digital audio devices as an audio
codec (for more details see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +UI2S AT command).
The I S interface can be alternatively set in different modes, by  parameter of AT+UI2S command:

PCM mode (short synchronization signal): I S word alignment signal is set high for 1 or 2 clock cycles for the
synchronization, and then is set low for 16 clock cycles according to the 17 or 18 clock cycles frame length.

Normal I S mode (long synchronization signal): I S word alignment is set high / low with a 50% duty cycle
(high for 16 clock cycles / low for 16 clock cycles, according to the 32 clock cycles frame length).
The I S interface can be alternatively set in different roles, by  parameter of AT+UI2S:

Master mode

Slave mode
The sample rate of transmitted/received words, which corresponds to the I S word alignment / synchronization
signal frequency, can be alternatively set by the  parameter of AT+UI2S to:

8 kHz

11.025 kHz

12 kHz

16 kHz

22.05 kHz

24 kHz

32 kHz

44.1 kHz

48 kHz
The modules support I S transmit and I S receive data 16-bit words long, linear, mono (or also dual mono in
Normal I2S mode). Data is transmitted and read in 2’s complement notation. MSB is transmitted and read first.
I S clock signal frequency depends on the frame length, the sample rate and the selected mode of operation:

17 x  or 18 x  in PCM mode (short synchronization signal)

16 x 2 x  in Normal I2S mode (long synchronization signal)
For the complete description of the possible configurations and settings of the I S digital audio interface
for PCM and Normal I S modes refer to the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +UI2S AT command.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 52 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.11 General Purpose Input/Output
TOBY-R2 series modules include 10 pins (GPIO1-GPIO6, I2S_TXD, I2S_RXD, I2S_CLK, I2S_WA) which can be
configured as General Purpose Input/Output or to provide custom functions via u-blox AT commands (for more
details see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +UGPIOC, +UGPIOR, +UGPIOW AT commands), as summarized
in Table 12.
Function
Description
Default GPIO
Configurable GPIOs
Network status
indication
Network status: registered home network, registered
roaming, data transmission, no service
--
GPIO1-GPIO4
GNSS supply enable13
Enable/disable the supply of u-blox GNSS receiver
connected to the cellular module
--
GPIO1-GPIO4
GNSS data ready13
Sense when u-blox GNSS receiver connected to the
module is ready for sending data by the DDC (I2C)
--
GPIO3
GNSS RTC sharing13
RTC synchronization signal to the u-blox GNSS receiver
connected to the cellular module
--
GPIO4
SIM card detection
External SIM card physical presence detection
GPIO5
GPIO5
SIM card hot
insertion/removal
Enable / disable SIM interface upon detection of external
SIM card physical insertion / removal
--
GPIO5
I2S digital audio
interface
I2S digital audio interface
I2S_RXD, I2S_TXD,
I2S_CLK, I2S_WA
I2S_RXD, I2S_TXD,
I2S_CLK, I2S_WA
Master clock output
13 MHz / 26 MHz clock output for an external device as
an audio codec or an external Wi-Fi chip/module
GPIO6
GPIO6
Wi-Fi control13
Control of an external Wi-Fi chip or module
--
--
General purpose input
Input to sense high or low digital level
--
All
General purpose output
Output to set the high or the low digital level
GPIO4
All
Pin disabled
Tri-state with an internal active pull-down enabled
GPIO1-GPIO3
All
Table 12: TOBY-R2 series GPIO custom functions configuration
1.12 Reserved pins (RSVD)
TOBY-R2 series modules have pins reserved for future use, marked as RSVD: they can all be left unconnected on
the application board, except

the RSVD pin number 6 that must be externally connected to ground

the RSVD pin number 18 that is recommended to be connected to a Test-Point for diagnostic access

the RSVD pin number 19 that is recommended to be connected to a Test-Point for diagnostic access
13
Not supported by “02” product versions.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 53 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.13 System features
1.13.1 Network indication
GPIOs can be configured by the AT command to indicate network status (for further details see section 1.11 and
the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], GPIO commands):

No service (no network coverage or not registered)

Registered 2G / 3G / LTE home network

Registered 2G / 3G / LTE visitor network (roaming)

Call enabled (RF data transmission / reception)
1.13.2 Antenna supervisor
The antenna detection function provided by the ANT_DET pin is based on an ADC measurement as optional
feature that can be implemented if the application requires it. The antenna supervisor is forced by the +UANTR
AT command (see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2] for more details).
The requirements to achieve antenna detection functionality are the following:

an RF antenna assembly with a built-in resistor (diagnostic circuit) must be used

an antenna detection circuit must be implemented on the application board
See section 1.7.2 for detailed antenna detection interface functional description and see section 2.4.2 for
detection circuit on application board and diagnostic circuit on antenna assembly design-in guidelines.
1.13.3 Jamming detection
Congestion detection (i.e. jamming detection) is not supported by “02” product versions.
In real network situations modules can experience various kind of out-of-coverage conditions: limited service
conditions when roaming to networks not supporting the specific SIM, limited service in cells which are not
suitable or barred due to operators’ choices, no cell condition when moving to poorly served or highly interfered
areas. In the latter case, interference can be artificially injected in the environment by a noise generator covering
a given spectrum, thus obscuring the operator’s carriers entitled to give access to the LTE/3G/2G service.
The congestion (i.e. jamming) detection feature can be enabled and configured by the +UCD AT command: the
feature consists of detecting an anomalous source of interference and signaling the start and stop of such
conditions to the host application processor with an unsolicited indication, which can react appropriately by e.g.
switching off the radio transceiver of the module (i.e. configuring the module in “airplane mode” by means of
the +CFUN AT command) in order to reduce power consumption and monitoring the environment at constant
periods (for more details see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +UCD AT command).
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 54 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.13.4 Dual stack IPv4/IPv6
TOBY-R2 series support both Internet Protocol version 4 and Internet Protocol version 6 in parallel.
For more details about dual stack IPv4/IPv6 see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2].
1.13.5 TCP/IP and UDP/IP
TOBY-R2 series modules provide embedded TCP/IP and UDP/IP protocol stack: a PDP context can be configured,
established and handled via the data connection management packet switched data commands.
TOBY-R2 series modules provide Direct Link mode to establish a transparent end-to-end communication with an
already connected TCP or UDP socket via serial interfaces (USB, UART). In Direct Link mode, data sent to the
serial interface from an external application processor is forwarded to the network and vice-versa.
For more details about embedded TCP/IP and UDP/IP functionalities see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2].
1.13.6 FTP
TOBY-R2 series provide embedded File Transfer Protocol (FTP) services. Files are read and stored in the local file
system of the module.
FTP files can also be transferred using FTP Direct Link:

FTP download: data coming from the FTP server is forwarded to the host processor via USB / UART serial
interfaces (for FTP without Direct Link mode the data is always stored in the module’s Flash File System)

FTP upload: data coming from the host processor via USB / UART serial interface is forwarded to the FTP
server (for FTP without Direct Link mode the data is read from the module’s Flash File System)
When Direct Link is used for a FTP file transfer, only the file content pass through USB / UART serial interface,
whereas all the FTP commands handling is managed internally by the FTP application.
For more details about embedded FTP functionalities see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2].
1.13.7 HTTP
TOBY-R2 series modules provide the embedded Hyper-Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) services via AT commands
for sending requests to a remote HTTP server, receiving the server response and transparently storing it in the
module’s Flash File System (FFS).
For more details about embedded HTTP functionalities see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2].
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 55 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.13.8 SSL / TLS
TOBY-R2 series modules support the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) / Transport Layer Security (TLS) with certificate
key sizes up to 4096 bits to provide security over the FTP and HTTP protocols.
The SSL/TLS support provides different connection security aspects:

Server authentication: use of the server certificate verification against a specific trusted certificate or a
trusted certificates list

Client authentication: use of the client certificate and the corresponding private key

Data security and integrity: data encryption and Hash Message Authentication Code (HMAC) generation
The security aspects used during a connection depend on the SSL/TLS configuration and features supported.
Table 13 contains the settings of the default SSL/TLS profile and Table 14 to Table 18 report the main SSL/TLS
supported capabilities of the products. For a complete list of supported configurations and settings see the
u-blox AT Commands Manual [2].
Settings
Value
Meaning
Certificates validation level
Level 0
The server certificate will not be checked or verified
Minimum SSL/TLS version
Any
Cipher suite
Automatic
The server can use any of the TLS1.0/TLS1.1/TLS1.2 versions for the
connection
The cipher suite will be negotiated in the handshake process
Trusted root certificate internal name
Expected server host-name
None
None
No certificate will be used for the server authentication
No server host-name is expected
Client certificate internal name
Client private key internal name
None
None
No client certificate will be used
No client private key will be used
Client private key password
Pre-shared key
None
None
No client private key password will be used
No pre-shared key password will be used
Table 13: Default SSL/TLS profile
SSL/TLS Version
SSL 2.0
SSL 3.0
NO
YES
TLS 1.0
TLS 1.1
YES
YES
TLS 1.2
YES
Table 14: SSL/TLS version support
Algorithm
RSA
YES
PSK
YES
Table 15: Authentication
Algorithm
RC4
NO
DES
3DES
YES
YES
AES128
AES256
YES
YES
Table 16: Encryption
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 56 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Algorithm
MD5
SHA/SHA1
NO
YES
SHA256
YES
YES
SHA384
Table 17: Message digest
Description
Registry value
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
0x00,0x2F
0x00,0x3C
YES
YES
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
0x00,0x35
0x00,0x3D
YES
YES
TLS_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5
0x00,0x0A
0x00,0x04
YES
NO
TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA
0x00,0x05
NO
TLS_PSK_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
TLS_PSK_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
0x00,0x8C
0x00,0x8D
YES
YES
TLS_PSK_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
TLS_RSA_PSK_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
0x00,0x8B
0x00,0x94
YES
YES
TLS_RSA_PSK_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
TLS_RSA_PSK_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
0x00,0x95
0x00,0x93
YES
YES
TLS_PSK_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
0x00,0xAE
YES
TLS_PSK_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
TLS_RSA_PSK_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
0x00,0xAF
0x00,0xB6
YES
YES
TLS_RSA_PSK_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
0x00,0xB7
YES
Table 18: TLS cipher suite registry
1.13.9 Bearer Independent Protocol
The Bearer Independent Protocol (BIP) is a mechanism by which a cellular module provides a SIM with access to
the data bearers supported by the network. With the BIP for Over-the-Air SIM provisioning, the data transfer
from and to the SIM uses either an already active PDP context or a new PDP context established with the APN
provided by the SIM card. For more details, see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2].
1.13.10 AssistNow clients and GNSS integration
AssistNow clients and u-blox GNSS receiver integration are not supported by “02” product versions.
For customers using u-blox GNSS receivers, the TOBY-R2 series cellular modules feature embedded AssistNow
clients. AssistNow A-GPS provides better GNSS performance and faster Time-To-First-Fix. The clients can be
enabled and disabled with an AT command (see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]).
TOBY-R2 series cellular modules act as a stand-alone AssistNow client, making AssistNow available with no
additional requirements for resources or software integration on an external host micro controller. Full access to
u-blox GNSS receivers is available via the TOBY-R2 series cellular module, through the DDC (I C) interface, while
the available GPIOs can handle the positioning chipset / module power-on/off. This means that cellular module
and GNSS receiver can be controlled through a single serial port from any host processor.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 57 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.13.11 Hybrid positioning and CellLocate®
®
Hybrid positioning and CellLocate are not supported by “02” product versions.
Although GNSS is a widespread technology, its reliance on the visibility of extremely weak GNSS satellite signals
means that positioning is not always possible. Especially difficult environments for GNSS are indoors, in enclosed
or underground parking garages, as well as in urban canyons where GNSS signals are blocked or jammed by
multipath interference. The situation can be improved by augmenting GNSS receiver data with cellular network
information to provide positioning information even when GNSS reception is degraded or absent. This additional
information can benefit numerous applications.
Positioning through cellular information: CellLocate
®
®
u-blox CellLocate enables the estimation of device position based on the parameters of the mobile network cells
®
visible to the specific device. To estimate its position the u-blox cellular module sends the CellLocate server the
parameters of network cells visible to it using a UDP connection. In return the server provides the estimated
®
position based on the CellLocate database. The module can either send the parameters of the visible home
network cells only (normal scan) or the parameters of all surrounding cells of all mobile operators (deep scan).
®
The CellLocate database is compiled from the position of devices which observed, in the past, a specific cell or
set of cells (historical observations) as follows:
®
1. Several devices reported their position to the CellLocate server when observing a specific cell (the As in the
picture represent the position of the devices which observed the same cell A)
®
2. CellLocate server defines the area of Cell A visibility
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 58 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
®
3. If a new device reports the observation of Cell A CellLocate is able to provide the estimated position from
the area of visibility
4. The visibility of multiple cells provides increased accuracy based on the intersection of areas of visibility.
®
®
CellLocate is implemented using a set of two AT commands that allow configuration of the CellLocate service
(AT+ULOCCELL) and requesting position according to the user configuration (AT+ULOC). The answer is provided
in the form of an unsolicited AT command including latitude, longitude and estimated accuracy.
®
The accuracy of the position estimated by CellLocate depends on the availability of historical observations
in the specific area.
Hybrid positioning
With u-blox Hybrid positioning technology, u-blox cellular devices can be triggered to provide their current
®
position using either a u-blox GNSS receiver or the position estimated from CellLocate . The choice depends on
which positioning method provides the best and fastest solution according to the user configuration, exploiting
the benefit of having multiple and complementary positioning methods.
Hybrid positioning is implemented through a set of three AT commands that allow configuration of the GNSS
®
receiver (AT+ULOCGNSS), configuration of the CellLocate service (AT+ULOCCELL), and requesting the position
according to the user configuration (AT+ULOC). The answer is provided in the form of an unsolicited AT
command including latitude, longitude and estimated accuracy (if the position has been estimated by
®
CellLocate ), and additional parameters if the position has been computed by the GNSS receiver.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 59 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
The configuration of mobile network cells does not remain static (e.g. new cells are continuously added or
existing cells are reconfigured by the network operators). For this reason, when a Hybrid positioning method has
been triggered and the GNSS receiver calculates the position, a database self-learning mechanism has been
implemented so that these positions are sent to the server to update the database and maintain its accuracy.
The use of hybrid positioning requires a connection via the DDC (I C) bus between the TOBY-R2 series cellular
module and the u-blox GNSS receiver (see sections 1.9.3 and 2.6.3).
See GNSS Implementation Application Note [13] for the complete description of the feature.
®
u-blox is extremely mindful of user privacy. When a position is sent to the CellLocate server u-blox is
unable to track the SIM used or the specific device.
1.13.12 Wi-Fi integration
u-blox short range communication Wi-Fi modules integration is not supported by “02” product versions.
Full access to u-blox short range communication Wi-Fi modules is available through a dedicated SDIO interface
(see sections 1.9.4 and 2.6.4). This means that combining a TOBY-R2 series cellular module with a u-blox short
range communication module gives designers full access to the Wi-Fi module directly via the cellular module, so
that a second interface connected to the Wi-Fi module is not necessary.
AT commands via the AT interfaces of the cellular module (UART, USB) allows a full control of the Wi-Fi module
from any host processor, because Wi-Fi control messages are relayed to the Wi-Fi module via the dedicated SDIO
interface.
All the management software for Wi-Fi module operations runs inside the cellular module in addition to those
required for cellular-only operation.
1.13.13 Firmware update Over AT (FOAT)
This feature allows upgrading the module firmware over USB / UART serial interfaces, using AT commands.

The +UFWUPD AT command triggers a reboot followed by the upgrade procedure at specified a baud rate

A special boot loader on the module performs firmware installation, security verifications and module reboot

Firmware authenticity verification is performed via a security signature during the download. The firmware is
then installed, overwriting the current version. In case of power loss during this phase, the boot loader
detects a fault at the next wake-up, and restarts the firmware download. After completing the upgrade, the
module is reset again and wakes-up in normal boot
For more details about Firmware update Over AT procedure see the Firmware Update Application Note [5] and
the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +UFWUPD AT command.
1.13.14 Firmware update Over The Air (FOTA)
This feature allows upgrading the module firmware over the LTE/3G/2G air interface.
In order to reduce the amount of data to be transmitted over the air, the implemented FOTA feature requires
downloading only a “delta file” instead of the full firmware. The delta file contains only the differences between
the two firmware versions (old and new), and is compressed. The firmware update procedure can be triggered
using dedicated AT command with the delta file stored in the module file system via over the air FTP.
For more details about Firmware update Over The Air procedure see the Firmware Update Application Note [5]
and the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2].
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 60 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
1.13.15 Smart temperature management
Cellular modules – independent of the specific model – always have a well defined operating temperature range.
This range should be respected to guarantee full device functionality and long life span.
Nevertheless there are environmental conditions that can affect operating temperature, e.g. if the device is
located near a heating/cooling source, if there is/isn’t air circulating, etc.
The module itself can also influence the environmental conditions; such as when it is transmitting at full power.
In this case its temperature increases very quickly and can raise the temperature nearby.
The best solution is always to properly design the system where the module is integrated. Nevertheless an extra
check/security mechanism embedded into the module is a good solution to prevent operation of the device
outside of the specified range.
Smart Temperature Supervisor (STS)
The Smart Temperature Supervisor is activated and configured by a dedicated AT+USTS command. See the
u-blox AT Commands Manual [2] for more details.
The cellular module measures the internal temperature (Ti) and its value is compared with predefined thresholds
to identify the actual working temperature range.
Temperature measurement is done inside the cellular module: the measured value could be different from
the environmental temperature (Ta).
Valid temperature range
Dangerous
area
Warning
area
t-2
Safe
area
t-1
Warning
area
t+1
Dangerous
area
t+2
Figure 24: Temperature range and limits
The entire temperature range is divided into sub-regions by limits (see Figure 24) named t-2, t-1, t+1 and t+2.

Within the first limit, (t-1 < Ti < t+1), the cellular module is in the normal working range, the Safe Area

In the Warning Area, (t-2 < Ti < t.1) or (t+1 < Ti < t+2), the cellular module is still inside the valid temperature
range, but the measured temperature approaches the limit (upper or lower). The module sends a warning to
the user (through the active AT communication interface), which can take, if possible, the necessary actions
to return to a safer temperature range or simply ignore the indication. The module is still in a valid and good
working condition

Outside the valid temperature range, (Ti < t -2) or (Ti > t+2), the device is working outside the specified range
and represents a dangerous working condition. This condition is indicated and the device shuts down to
avoid damage
For security reasons the shutdown is suspended in case an emergency call in progress. In this case the
device will switch off at call termination.
The user can decide at anytime to enable/disable the Smart Temperature Supervisor feature. If the feature
is disabled there is no embedded protection against disallowed temperature conditions.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
System description
Page 61 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Figure 25 shows the flow diagram implemented for the Smart Temperature Supervisor.
No
IF STS
enabled
Feature disabled:
no action
Yes
Feature enabled
(full logic or
indication only)
Read
temperature
Yes
Temperature is
within normal
operating range
No
No
further
actions
IF
(t-1 5V?
No, less than 5 V
Yes, greater than 5 V
Linear LDO
Regulator
Switching Step-Down
Regulator
Figure 26: VCC supply concept selection
The switching step-down regulator is the typical choice when the available primary supply source has a nominal
voltage much higher (e.g. greater than 5 V) than the operating supply voltage of TOBY-R2 series. The use of
switching step-down provides the best power efficiency for the overall application and minimizes current drawn
from the main supply source. See sections 2.2.1.2, 2.2.1.6, 2.2.1.11, 2.2.1.12 for specific design-in.
The use of an LDO linear regulator becomes convenient for a primary supply with a relatively low voltage (e.g.
less or equal than 5 V). In this case the typical 90% efficiency of the switching regulator diminishes the benefit
of voltage step-down and no true advantage is gained in input current savings. On the opposite side, linear
regulators are not recommended for high voltage step-down as they dissipate a considerable amount of energy
in thermal power. See sections 2.2.1.3, 2.2.1.6, 2.2.1.11, 2.2.1.12 for specific design-in.
If TOBY-R2 series modules are deployed in a mobile unit where no permanent primary supply source is available,
then a battery will be required to provide VCC. A standard 3-cell Li-Ion or Li-Pol battery pack directly connected
to VCC is the usual choice for battery-powered devices. During charging, batteries with Ni-MH chemistry
typically reach a maximum voltage that is above the maximum rating for VCC, and should therefore be avoided.
See sections 2.2.1.4, 2.2.1.6, 2.2.1.7, 2.2.1.11, 2.2.1.12 for specific design-in.
Keep in mind that the use of rechargeable batteries requires the implementation of a suitable charger circuit
which is not included in the modules. The charger circuit has to be designed to prevent over-voltage on VCC
pins, and it should be selected according to the application requirements: a DC/DC switching charger is the
typical choice when the charging source has an high nominal voltage (e.g. ~12 V), whereas a linear charger is
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 65 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
the typical choice when the charging source has a relatively low nominal voltage (~5 V). If both a permanent
primary supply / charging source (e.g. ~12 V) and a rechargeable back-up battery (e.g. 3.7 V Li-Pol) are available
at the same time as possible supply source, then a proper charger / regulator with integrated power path
management function can be selected to supply the module while simultaneously and independently charging
the battery. See sections 2.2.1.8, 2.2.1.9, and 2.2.1.4, 2.2.1.6, 2.2.1.7, 2.2.1.11, 2.2.1.12 for specific design-in.
An appropriate primary (not rechargeable) battery can be selected taking into account the maximum current
specified in TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1] during connected-mode, considering that primary cells might have
weak power capability. See sections 2.2.1.5, and 2.2.1.6, 2.2.1.7, 2.2.1.11, 2.2.1.12 for specific design-in.
The usage of more than one DC supply at the same time should be carefully evaluated: depending on the supply
source characteristics, different DC supply systems can result as mutually exclusive.
The usage of a regulator or a battery not able to support the highest peak of VCC current consumption specified
in the TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1] is generally not recommended. However, if the selected regulator or battery
is not able to support the highest peak current of the module, it must be able to support with adequate margin
at least the highest averaged current consumption value specified in the TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1]. The
additional energy required by the module during a 2G Tx slot can be provided by an appropriate bypass tank
capacitor or a super-capacitor with very large capacitance and very low ESR placed close to the module VCC
pins. Depending on the actual capability of the selected regulator or battery, the required capacitance can be
considerably larger than 1 mF and the required ESR can be in the range of few tens of m. Carefully evaluate
the super-capacitor characteristics since aging and temperature may affect the actual characteristics.
The following sections highlight some design aspects for each of the supplies listed above providing application
circuit design-in compliant with the module VCC requirements summarized in Table 6.
2.2.1.2 Guidelines for VCC supply circuit design using a switching regulator
The use of a switching regulator is suggested when the difference from the available supply rail source to the
VCC value is high, since switching regulators provide good efficiency transforming a 12 V or greater voltage
supply to the typical 3.8 V value of the VCC supply.
The characteristics of the switching regulator connected to VCC pins should meet the following prerequisites to
comply with the module VCC requirements summarized in Table 6:

Power capability: the switching regulator with its output circuit must be capable of providing a voltage
value to the VCC pins within the specified operating range and must be capable of delivering to VCC pins
the maximum peak / pulse current consumption during Tx burst at maximum Tx power specified in the
TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1].

Low output ripple: the switching regulator together with its output circuit must be capable of providing a
clean (low noise) VCC voltage profile.

High switching frequency: for best performance and for smaller applications it is recommended to select a
switching frequency ≥ 600 kHz (since L-C output filter is typically smaller for high switching frequency). The
use of a switching regulator with a variable switching frequency or with a switching frequency lower than
600 kHz must be carefully evaluated since this can produce noise in the VCC voltage profile and therefore
negatively impact LTE/3G/2G modulation spectrum performance. An additional L-C low-pass filter between
the switching regulator output to VCC supply pins can mitigate the ripple at the input of the module, but
adds extra voltage drop due to resistive losses on series inductors.

PWM mode operation: it is preferable to select regulators with Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) mode.
While in connected-mode, the Pulse Frequency Modulation (PFM) mode and PFM/PWM modes transitions
must be avoided to reduce noise on VCC voltage profile. Switching regulators can be used that are able to
switch between low ripple PWM mode and high ripple PFM mode, provided that the mode transition occurs
when the module changes status from the idle/active-modes to connected-mode. It is permissible to use a
regulator that switches from the PWM mode to the burst or PFM mode at an appropriate current threshold.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 66 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Figure 27 and Table 19 show an example of a high reliability power supply circuit, where the module VCC input
is supplied by a step-down switching regulator capable of delivering maximum current with low output ripple
and with fixed switching frequency in PWM mode operation greater than 1 MHz.
12V
TOBY-R2 series
VIN
5 RUN
R1
BD
10 RT
R2
C1
C2
7 PG
R3
C3 C4
C5
71
BOOST 2
9 VC
SW
VCC
VCC
72 VCC
70
C6
L1
D1
U1
R4
C7
C8
FB 8
SYNC
GND
11
R5
GND
Figure 27: Example of high reliability VCC supply application circuit using a step-down regulator
Reference
Description
Part Number - Manufacturer
C1
C2
10 µF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 5750 15% 50 V
10 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V
C5750X7R1H106MB - TDK
GRM155R71C103KA01 - Murata
C3
C4
680 pF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V
22 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 25 V
GRM155R71H681KA01 - Murata
GRM1555C1H220JZ01 - Murata
C5
C6
10 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V
470 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0603 10% 25 V
GRM155R71C103KA01 - Murata
GRM188R71E474KA12 - Murata
C7
22 µF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 1210 10% 25 V
GRM32ER61E226KE15 - Murata
C8
T520D337M006ATE045 - KEMET
D1
330 µF Capacitor Tantalum D_SIZE 6.3 V 45 m
Schottky Diode 40 V 3 A
L1
10 µH Inductor 744066100 30% 3.6 A
744066100 - Wurth Electronics
R1
470 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
2322-705-87474-L - Yageo
R2
15 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
2322-705-87153-L - Yageo
R3
22 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
2322-705-87223-L - Yageo
R4
390 k Resistor 0402 1% 0.063 W
RC0402FR-07390KL - Yageo
R5
100 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
2322-705-70104-L - Yageo
U1
Step-Down Regulator MSOP10 3.5 A 2.4 MHz
LT3972IMSE#PBF - Linear Technology
MBRA340T3G - ON Semiconductor
Table 19: Components for high reliability VCC supply application circuit using a step-down regulator
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 67 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Figure 28 and the components listed in Table 20 show an example of a low cost power supply circuit, where the
VCC module supply is provided by a step-down switching regulator capable of delivering to VCC pins the
specified maximum peak / pulse current, transforming a 12 V supply input.
12V
TOBY-R2 series
VCC
OUT 1
3 INH
L1
D1
C1
6 FSW
C6
R5
U1
2 SYNC
70 VCC
71 VCC
R1
72 VCC
R3
C3
FB 5
C4
R4
COMP 4
C2
R2
GND
GND
C5
Figure 28: Example of low cost VCC supply application circuit using a step-down regulator
Reference
Description
Part Number - Manufacturer
C1
22 µF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 1210 10% 25 V
GRM32ER61E226KE15 – Murata
C2
100 µF Capacitor Tantalum B_SIZE 20% 6.3V 15m
T520B107M006ATE015 – Kemet
C3
C4
5.6 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 50 V
6.8 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 50 V
GRM155R71H562KA88 – Murata
GRM155R71H682KA88 – Murata
C5
C6
56 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V
220 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0603 10% 25 V
GRM1555C1H560JA01 – Murata
GRM188R71E224KA88 – Murata
D1
Schottky Diode 25V 2 A
STPS2L25 – STMicroelectronics
L1
5.2 µH Inductor 30% 5.28A 22 m
MSS1038-522NL – Coilcraft
R1
4.7 k Resistor 0402 1% 0.063 W
RC0402FR-074K7L – Yageo
R2
910  Resistor 0402 1% 0.063 W
RC0402FR-07910RL – Yageo
R3
82  Resistor 0402 5% 0.063 W
RC0402JR-0782RL – Yageo
R4
8.2 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.063 W
RC0402JR-078K2L – Yageo
R5
39 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.063 W
RC0402JR-0739KL – Yageo
U1
Step-Down Regulator 8-VFQFPN 3 A 1 MHz
L5987TR – ST Microelectronics
Table 20: Components for low cost VCC supply application circuit using a step-down regulator
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 68 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.2.1.3 Guidelines for VCC supply circuit design using a Low Drop-Out linear regulator
The use of a linear regulator is suggested when the difference from the available supply rail source and the VCC
value is low. The linear regulators provide high efficiency when transforming a 5 VDC supply to a voltage value
within the module VCC normal operating range.
The characteristics of the Low Drop-Out (LDO) linear regulator connected to VCC pins should meet the following
prerequisites to comply with the module VCC requirements summarized in Table 6:

Power capabilities: the LDO linear regulator with its output circuit must be capable of providing a voltage
value to the VCC pins within the specified operating range and must be capable of delivering to VCC pins
the maximum peak / pulse current consumption during Tx burst at maximum Tx power specified in TOBY-R2
series Data Sheet [1].

Power dissipation: the power handling capability of the LDO linear regulator must be checked to limit its
junction temperature to the maximum rated operating range (i.e. check the voltage drop from the max input
voltage to the minimum output voltage to evaluate the power dissipation of the regulator).
Figure 29 and the components listed in Table 21 show an example of a power supply circuit, where the VCC
module supply is provided by an LDO linear regulator capable of delivering the required current, with proper
power handling capability.
It is recommended to configure the LDO linear regulator to generate a voltage supply value slightly below the
maximum limit of the module VCC normal operating range (e.g. ~4.1 V for the VCC, as in the circuits described
in Figure 29 and Table 21). This reduces the power on the linear regulator and improves the thermal design of
the circuit.
TOBY-R2 series
5V
IN
OUT
VCC
VCC
72 VCC
70
71
U1
C1
R1
ADJ
SHDN
R2
C2
C3
GND
GND
R3
Figure 29: Example of high reliability VCC supply application circuit using an LDO linear regulator
Reference
Description
Part Number - Manufacturer
C1, C2
10 µF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 0603 20% 6.3 V
GRM188R60J106ME47 - Murata
C3
330 µF Capacitor Tantalum D_SIZE 6.3 V 45 m
T520D337M006ATE045 - KEMET
R1
47 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
RC0402JR-0747KL - Yageo Phycomp
R2
9.1 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
RC0402JR-079K1L - Yageo Phycomp
R3
3.9 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
RC0402JR-073K9L - Yageo Phycomp
U1
LDO Linear Regulator ADJ 3.0 A
LT1764AEQ#PBF - Linear Technology
Table 21: Components for high reliability VCC supply application circuit using an LDO linear regulator
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 69 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Figure 30 and the components listed in Table 22 show an example of a low cost power supply circuit, where the
VCC module supply is provided by an LDO linear regulator capable of delivering the specified highest peak /
pulse current, with proper power handling capability. The regulator described in this example supports a limited
input voltage range and it includes internal circuitry for current and thermal protection.
It is recommended to configure the LDO linear regulator to generate a voltage supply value slightly below the
maximum limit of the module VCC normal operating range (e.g. ~4.1 V as in the circuit described in Figure 30
and Table 22). This reduces the power on the linear regulator and improves the whole thermal design of the
supply circuit.
TOBY-R2 series
5V
IN
OUT
VCC
VCC
72 VCC
70
71
U1
C1
ADJ
EN
R1
C2
C3
GND
GND
R2
Figure 30: Example of low cost VCC supply application circuit using an LDO linear regulator
Reference
Description
Part Number - Manufacturer
C1, C2
10 µF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 0603 20% 6.3 V
GRM188R60J106ME47 - Murata
C3
330 µF Capacitor Tantalum D_SIZE 6.3 V 45 m
T520D337M006ATE045 - KEMET
R1
27 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
RC0402JR-0727KL - Yageo Phycomp
R2
4.7 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
LDO Linear Regulator ADJ 3.0 A
RC0402JR-074K7L - Yageo Phycomp
U1
LP38501ATJ-ADJ/NOPB - Texas Instrument
Table 22: Components for low cost VCC supply application circuit using an LDO linear regulator
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 70 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.2.1.4 Guidelines for VCC supply circuit design using a rechargeable Li-Ion or Li-Pol battery
Rechargeable Li-Ion or Li-Pol batteries connected to the VCC pins should meet the following prerequisites to
comply with the module VCC requirements summarized in Table 6:

Maximum pulse and DC discharge current: the rechargeable Li-Ion battery with its related output circuit
connected to the VCC pins must be capable of delivering a pulse current as the maximum peak / pulse
current consumption during Tx burst at maximum Tx power specified in TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1] and
must be capable of extensively delivering a DC current as the maximum average current consumption
specified in TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1]. The maximum discharge current is not always reported in the
data sheets of batteries, but the maximum DC discharge current is typically almost equal to the battery
capacity in Amp-hours divided by 1 hour.

DC series resistance: the rechargeable Li-Ion battery with its output circuit must be capable of avoiding a
VCC voltage drop below the operating range summarized in Table 6 during transmit bursts.
2.2.1.5
Guidelines for VCC supply circuit design using a primary (disposable) battery
The characteristics of a primary (non-rechargeable) battery connected to VCC pins should meet the following
prerequisites to comply with the module VCC requirements summarized in Table 6:

Maximum pulse and DC discharge current: the non-rechargeable battery with its related output circuit
connected to the VCC pins must be capable of delivering a pulse current as the maximum peak current
consumption during Tx burst at maximum Tx power specified in TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1] and must be
capable of extensively delivering a DC current as the maximum average current consumption specified in
TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1]. The maximum discharge current is not always reported in the data sheets of
batteries, but the max DC discharge current is typically almost equal to the battery capacity in Amp-hours
divided by 1 hour.

DC series resistance: the non-rechargeable battery with its output circuit must be capable of avoiding a
VCC voltage drop below the operating range summarized in Table 6 during transmit bursts.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 71 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.2.1.6 Additional guidelines for VCC supply circuit design
To reduce voltage drops, use a low impedance power source. The series resistance of the power supply lines
(connected to the modules’ VCC and GND pins) on the application board and battery pack should also be
considered and minimized: cabling and routing must be as short as possible to minimize power losses.
Three pins are allocated to VCC supply. Several pins are designated for GND connection. It is recommended to
properly connect all of them to supply the module to minimize series resistance losses.
In case of modules supporting 2G radio access technology, to avoid voltage drop undershoot and overshoot at
the start and end of a transmit burst during a GSM call (when current consumption on the VCC supply can rise
up as specified in the TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1]), place a bypass capacitor with large capacitance (at least
100 µF) and low ESR near the VCC pins, for example:

330 µF capacitance, 45 m ESR (e.g. KEMET T520D337M006ATE045, Tantalum Capacitor)
To reduce voltage ripple and noise, improving RF performance especially if the application device integrates an
internal antenna, place the following bypass capacitors near the VCC pins:

68 pF capacitor with Self-Resonant Frequency in the 800/900 MHz range (e.g. Murata GRM1555C1H680J)

15 pF capacitor with Self-Resonant Frequency in 1800/1900 MHz range (e.g. Murata GRM1555C1E150J)

10 nF capacitor (e.g. Murata GRM155R71C103K) to filter digital logic noise from clocks and data sources

100 nF capacitor (e.g. Murata GRM155R61C104K) to filter digital logic noise from clocks and data sources
A suitable series ferrite bead can be properly placed on the VCC line for additional noise filtering if required by
the specific application according to the whole application board design.
TOBY-R2 series
3V8
VCC
VCC
VCC
70
71
72
C1
GND
C2
C3
C4
C5
Recommended for
cellular modules
supporting 2G
Figure 31: Suggested schematic for the VCC bypass capacitors to reduce ripple / noise on supply voltage profile
Reference
Description
Part Number - Manufacturer
C1
C2
15 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V
68 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V
GRM1555C1H150JA01 - Murata
GRM1555C1H680JA01 - Murata
C3
10 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V
GRM155R71C103KA01 - Murata
C4
C5
100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V
GRM155R71C104KA01 - Murata
T520D337M006ATE045 - KEMET
330 µF Capacitor Tantalum D_SIZE 6.3 V 45 m
Table 23: Suggested components to reduce ripple / noise on VCC
The necessity of each part depends on the specific design, but it is recommended to provide all the bypass
capacitors described in Figure 31 / Table 23 if the application device integrates an internal antenna.
ESD sensitivity rating of the VCC supply pins is 1 kV (HBM according to JESD22-A114). Higher protection
level can be required if the line is externally accessible on the application board, e.g. if accessible battery
connector is directly connected to the supply pins. Higher protection level can be achieved by mounting
an ESD protection (e.g. EPCOS CA05P4S14THSG varistor) close to accessible point.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 72 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.2.1.7 Additional guidelines for VCC supply circuit design of TOBY-R200 modules
TOBY-R200 modules provide separate supply inputs over the VCC pins (see Figure 3):

VCC pins #71 and #72 represent the supply input for the internal RF power amplifier, demanding most of
the total current drawn of the module when RF transmission is enabled during a voice/data call

VCC pin #70 represents the supply input for the internal baseband Power Management Unit and the internal
transceiver, demanding minor part of the total current drawn of the module when RF transmission is
enabled during a voice/data call
All the VCC pins are in general intended to be connected to the same external power supply circuit, but separate
supply sources can be implemented for specific (e.g. battery-powered) applications considering that the voltage
at the VCC pins #71 and #72 can drop to a value lower than the one at the VCC pin #70, keeping the module
still switched-on and functional. Figure 32 describes a possible application circuit.
L1
D1
TOBY-R200
Step-up
Regulator
VIN
SHDNn
C6
70 VCC
SW
R1
FB
C8
R2
GND
C7
U1
Li-Ion/Li-Pol
Battery
71 VCC
72 VCC
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5
GND
Figure 32: VCC circuit example with separate supply for TOBY-R200 modules
Reference
Description
Part Number - Manufacturer
C1
330 µF Capacitor Tantalum D_SIZE 6.3 V 45 m
T520D337M006ATE045 - KEMET
C2
C3
10 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V
100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V
GRM155R71C103KA01 - Murata
GRM155R61A104KA01 - Murata
C4
68 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V
GRM1555C1H680JA01 - Murata
C5
C6
15 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 25 V
10 µF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 0603 20% 6.3 V
GRM1555C1E150JA01 - Murata
GRM188R60J106ME47 - Murata
C7
C8
22 µF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 1210 10% 25 V
10 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 25 V
GRM32ER61E226KE15 - Murata
GRM1555C1E100JA01 - Murata
D1
L1
Schottky Diode 40 V 1 A
10 µH Inductor 20% 1 A 276 m
SS14 - Vishay General Semiconductor
SRN3015-100M - Bourns Inc.
R1
1 M Resistor 0402 5% 0.063 W
RC0402FR-071ML - Yageo Phycomp
R2
412 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.063 W
RC0402FR-07412KL - Yageo Phycomp
U1
Step-up Regulator 350 mA
AP3015 - Diodes Incorporated
Table 24: Example of components for VCC circuit with separate supply for TOBY-R200 modules
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 73 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.2.1.8 Guidelines for external battery charging circuit
TOBY-R2 series modules do not have an on-board charging circuit. Figure 33 provides an example of a battery
charger design, suitable for applications that are battery powered with a Li-Ion (or Li-Polymer) cell.
In the application circuit, a rechargeable Li-Ion (or Li-Polymer) battery cell, that features proper pulse and DC
discharge current capabilities and proper DC series resistance, is directly connected to the VCC supply input of
the module. Battery charging is completely managed by the STMicroelectronics L6924U Battery Charger IC that,
from a USB power source (5.0 V typ.), charges as a linear charger the battery, in three phases:

Pre-charge constant current (active when the battery is deeply discharged): the battery is charged with a
low current, set to 10% of the fast-charge current

Fast-charge constant current: the battery is charged with the maximum current, configured by the value
of an external resistor to a value suitable for USB power source (~500 mA)

Constant voltage: when the battery voltage reaches the regulated output voltage (4.2 V), the L6924U
starts to reduce the current until the charge termination is done. The charging process ends when the
charging current reaches the value configured by an external resistor to ~15 mA or when the charging timer
reaches the value configured by an external capacitor to ~9800 s
Using a battery pack with an internal NTC resistor, the L6924U can monitor the battery temperature to protect
the battery from operating under unsafe thermal conditions.
The L6924U, as linear charger, is more suitable for applications where the charging source has a relatively low
nominal voltage (~5 V), so that a switching charger is suggested for applications where the charging source has
a relatively high nominal voltage (e.g. ~12 V, see the following section 2.2.1.9 for specific design-in).
Li-Ion/Li-Polymer
Battery Charger IC
TOBY-R2 series
5V0
USB
Supply
VIN
R1
R2
R3
VOUT
VINSNS
VOSNS
MODE
VREF
ISEL
IAC
Li-Ion/Li-Pol
Battery Pack
C3
IUSB
70 VCC
71 VCC
72 VCC
R4
C4
TH
θ
IEND
C5 C6 C7 C8 C9
TPRG
SD
C1
B1
GND
C2
U1
GND
D1 D2
Figure 33: Li-Ion (or Li-Polymer) battery charging application circuit
Reference
Description
Part Number - Manufacturer
B1
Li-Ion (or Li-Polymer) battery pack with 470  NTC
Various manufacturer
C1, C4
C2, C6
1 µF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0603 10% 16 V
10 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V
GRM188R71C105KA12 - Murata
GRM155R71C103KA01 - Murata
C3
C5
1 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 50 V
330 µF Capacitor Tantalum D_SIZE 6.3 V 45 m
GRM155R71H102KA01 - Murata
T520D337M006ATE045 - KEMET
C7
100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V
GRM155R61A104KA01 - Murata
C8
C9
68 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V
15 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V
GRM1555C1H680JA01 - Murata
GRM1555C1H150JA01 - Murata
D1, D2
R1, R2
Low Capacitance ESD Protection
24 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
CG0402MLE-18G - Bourns
RC0402JR-0724KL - Yageo Phycomp
R3
3.3 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
RC0402JR-073K3L - Yageo Phycomp
R4
1.0 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
RC0402JR-071K0L - Yageo Phycomp
U1
Single Cell Li-Ion (or Li-Polymer) Battery Charger IC
L6924U - STMicroelectronics
Table 25: Suggested components for Li-Ion (or Li-Polymer) battery charging application circuit
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 74 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.2.1.9 Guidelines for external battery charging and power path management circuit
Application devices where both a permanent primary supply / charging source (e.g. ~12 V) and a rechargeable
back-up battery (e.g. 3.7 V Li-Pol) are available at the same time as possible supply source should implement a
suitable charger / regulator with integrated power path management function to supply the module and the
whole device while simultaneously and independently charging the battery.
Figure 34 reports a simplified block diagram circuit showing the working principle of a charger / regulator with
integrated power path management function. This component allows the system to be powered by a permanent
primary supply source (e.g. ~12 V) using the integrated regulator which simultaneously and independently
recharges the battery (e.g. 3.7 V Li-Pol) that represents the back-up supply source of the system: the power path
management feature permits the battery to supplement the system current requirements when the primary
supply source is not available or cannot deliver the peak system currents.
A power management IC should meet the following prerequisites to comply with the module VCC requirements
summarized in Table 6:

High efficiency internal step down converter, compliant with the performances specified in section 2.2.1.2

Low internal resistance in the active path Vout – Vbat, typically lower than 50 m

High efficiency switch mode charger with separate power path control
Power path management IC
12 V
Primary
Source
Vin
System
Vout
DC/DC converter
and battery FET
control logic
Vbat
Li-Ion/Li-Pol
Battery Pack
Charge
controller
GND
GND
θ
Figure 34: Charger / regulator with integrated power path management circuit block diagram
Figure 35 and the components listed in Table 26 provide an application circuit example where the MPS MP2617
switching charger / regulator with integrated power path management function provides the supply to the
cellular module while concurrently and autonomously charging a suitable Li-Ion (or Li-Polymer) battery with
proper pulse and DC discharge current capabilities and proper DC series resistance according to the rechargeable
battery recommendations described in section 2.2.1.4.
The MP2617 IC constantly monitors the battery voltage and selects whether to use the external main primary
supply / charging source or the battery as supply source for the module, and starts a charging phase accordingly.
The MP2617 IC normally provides a supply voltage to the module regulated from the external main primary
source allowing immediate system operation even under missing or deeply discharged battery: the integrated
switching step-down regulator is capable to provide up to 3 A output current with low output ripple and fixed
1.6 MHz switching frequency in PWM mode operation. The module load is satisfied in priority, then the
integrated switching charger will take the remaining current to charge the battery.
Additionally, the power path control allows an internal connection from battery to the module with a low series
internal ON resistance (40 m typical), in order to supplement additional power to the module when the current
demand increases over the external main primary source or when this external source is removed.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 75 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Battery charging is managed in three phases:

Pre-charge constant current (active when the battery is deeply discharged): the battery is charged with a
low current, set to 10% of the fast-charge current

Fast-charge constant current: the battery is charged with the maximum current, configured by the value
of an external resistor to a value suitable for the application

Constant voltage: when the battery voltage reaches the regulated output voltage (4.2 V), the current is
progressively reduced until the charge termination is done. The charging process ends when the charging
current reaches the 10% of the fast-charge current or when the charging timer reaches the value configured
by an external capacitor
Using a battery pack with an internal NTC resistor, the MP2617 can monitor the battery temperature to protect
the battery from operating under unsafe thermal conditions.
Several parameters as the charging current, the charging timings, the input current limit, the input voltage limit,
the system output voltage can be easily set according to the specific application requirements, as the actual
electrical characteristics of the battery and the external supply / charging source: proper resistors or capacitors
have to be accordingly connected to the related pins of the IC.
Li-Ion/Li-Polymer Battery
Charger / Regulator with
Power Path Managment
BST
12V
L1
SW
Primary
Source
VIN
TOBY-R2 series
C4
72 VCC
R4
C5
VLIM
R5
Li-Ion/Li-Pol
Battery Pack
BAT
R1
R2
EN
ILIM
NTC
ISET
VCC
TMR
C1
70 VCC
71 VCC
SYS
C2
AGND PGND
C10 C11 C12 C13 C14
θ
R3
C3
C6 C7 C8
GND
D1 D2
B1
U1
Figure 35: Li-Ion (or Li-Polymer) battery charging and power path management application circuit
Reference
Description
Part Number - Manufacturer
B1
Li-Ion (or Li-Polymer) battery pack with 10 k NTC
Various manufacturer
C1, C5, C6
C2, C4, C11
22 µF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 1210 10% 25 V
100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V
GRM32ER61E226KE15 - Murata
GRM155R61A104KA01 - Murata
C3
C7, C13
1 µF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0603 10% 25 V
68 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V
GRM188R71E105KA12 - Murata
GRM1555C1H680JA01 - Murata
C8, C14
15 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 25 V
GRM1555C1E150JA01 - Murata
C10
330 µF Capacitor Tantalum D_SIZE 6.3 V 45 m
10 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V
T520D337M006ATE045 - KEMET
D1, D2
R1, R3, R5
Low Capacitance ESD Protection
10 k Resistor 0402 5% 1/16 W
CG0402MLE-18G - Bourns
RC0402JR-0710KL - Yageo Phycomp
R2
1.0 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
RC0402JR-071K0L - Yageo Phycomp
R4
22 k Resistor 0402 5% 1/16 W
RC0402JR-0722KL - Yageo Phycomp
L1
1.2 µH Inductor 6 A 21 m 20%
Li-Ion/Li-Polymer Battery DC/DC Charger / Regulator
with integrated Power Path Management function
7447745012 - Wurth
C12
U1
GRM155R71C103KA01 - Murata
MP2617 - Monolithic Power Systems (MPS)
Table 26: Suggested components for Li-Ion (or Li-Polymer) battery charging and power path management application circuit
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 76 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.2.1.10 Guidelines for removing VCC supply
As described in section 1.6.2 and Figure 15, the VCC supply can be removed after the end of TOBY-R2 series
modules internal power-off sequence, which has to be properly started sending the AT+CPWROFF command
(see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]).
Removing the VCC power can be useful in order to minimize the current consumption when the TOBY-R2 series
modules are switched off. Then, the modules can be switched on again by re-applying the VCC supply.
If the VCC supply is generated by a switching or an LDO regulator, the application processor may control the
input pin of the regulator which is provided to enable / disable the output of the regulator (as for example the
RUN input pin for the regulator described in Figure 27, the INH input pin for the regulator described in Figure 28,
the SHDNn input pin for the regulator described in Figure 29, the EN input pin for the regulator described in
Figure 30), in order to apply / remove the VCC supply.
If the regulator that generates the VCC supply does not provide an on / off pin, or for other applications such as
the battery-powered ones, the VCC supply can be switched off using an appropriate external p-channel MOSFET
controlled by the application processor by means of a proper inverting transistor as shown in Figure 36, given
that the external p-channel MOSFET has provide:

Very low RDS(ON) (for example, less than 50 m), to minimize voltage drops

Adequate maximum Drain current (see TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1] for module consumption figures)

Low leakage current, to minimize the current consumption
TOBY-R2 series
70 VCC
71 VCC
T1
VCC Supply Source
72 VCC
R3
Application
Processor
GPIO
GND
R2
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5
T2
R1
GND
Figure 36: Example of application circuit for VCC supply removal
Reference
Description
Part Number - Manufacturer
R1
47 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
RC0402JR-0747KL - Yageo Phycomp
R2
10 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
RC0402JR-0710KL - Yageo Phycomp
R3
100 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
RC0402JR-07100KL - Yageo Phycomp
T1
T2
P-Channel MOSFET Low On-Resistance
NPN BJT Transistor
AO3415 - Alpha & Omega Semiconductor Inc.
BC847 - Infineon
C1
330 µF Capacitor Tantalum D_SIZE 6.3 V 45 m
10 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V
T520D337M006ATE045 - KEMET
C2
C3
100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V
GRM155R61A104KA01 - Murata
C4
C5
56 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 25 V
15 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 25 V
GRM1555C1E560JA01 - Murata
GRM1555C1E150JA01 - Murata
GRM155R71C103KA01 - Murata
Table 27: Components for VCC supply removal application circuit
It is highly recommended to avoid an abrupt removal of the VCC supply during TOBY-R2 series modules
normal operations: the power off procedure must be started by the AT+CPWROFF command, waiting the
command response for a proper time period (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]), and then a proper
VCC supply has to be held at least until the end of the modules’ internal power off sequence, which
occurs when the generic digital interfaces supply output (V_INT) is switched off by the module.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 77 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.2.1.11 Guidelines for VCC supply layout design
Good connection of the module VCC pins with DC supply source is required for correct RF performance.
Guidelines are summarized in the following list:

All the available VCC pins must be connected to the DC source

VCC connection must be as wide as possible and as short as possible

Any series component with Equivalent Series Resistance (ESR) greater than few milliohms must be avoided

VCC connection must be routed through a PCB area separated from RF lines / parts, sensitive analog signals
and sensitive functional units: it is good practice to interpose at least one layer of PCB ground between the
VCC track and other signal routing

Coupling between VCC and digital lines, especially USB, must be avoided.

The tank bypass capacitor with low ESR for current spikes smoothing described in section 2.2.1.6 should be
placed close to the VCC pins. If the main DC source is a switching DC-DC converter, place the large
capacitor close to the DC-DC output and minimize VCC track length. Otherwise consider using separate
capacitors for DC-DC converter and module tank capacitor

The bypass capacitors in the pF range described in Figure 31 and Table 23 should be placed as close as
possible to the VCC pins, where the VCC line narrows close to the module input pins, improving the RF
noise rejection in the band centered on the Self-Resonant Frequency of the pF capacitors. This is highly
recommended if the application device integrates an internal antenna

Since VCC input provide the supply to RF Power Amplifiers, voltage ripple at high frequency may result in
unwanted spurious modulation of transmitter RF signal. This is more likely to happen with switching DC-DC
converters, in which case it is better to select the highest operating frequency for the switcher and add a
large L-C filter before connecting to the TOBY-R2 series modules in the worst case

Shielding of switching DC-DC converter circuit, or at least the use of shielded inductors for the switching
DC-DC converter, may be considered since all switching power supplies may potentially generate interfering
signals as a result of high-frequency high-power switching.

If VCC is protected by transient voltage suppressor to ensure that the voltage maximum ratings are not
exceeded, place the protecting device along the path from the DC source toward the module, preferably
closer to the DC source (otherwise protection functionality may be compromised)
2.2.1.12 Guidelines for grounding layout design
Good connection of the module GND pins with application board solid ground layer is required for correct RF
performance. It significantly reduces EMC issues and provides a thermal heat sink for the module.

Connect each GND pin with application board solid GND layer. It is strongly recommended that each GND
pad surrounding VCC pins have one or more dedicated via down to the application board solid ground layer

The VCC supply current flows back to main DC source through GND as ground current: provide adequate
return path with suitable uninterrupted ground plane to main DC source

It is recommended to implement one layer of the application board as ground plane as wide as possible

If the application board is a multilayer PCB, then all the board layers should be filled with GND plane as
much as possible and each GND area should be connected together with complete via stack down to the
main ground layer of the board. Use as many vias as possible to connect the ground planes

Provide a dense line of vias at the edges of each ground area, in particular along RF and high speed lines

If the whole application device is composed by more than one PCB, then it is required to provide a good and
solid ground connection between the GND areas of all the different PCBs

Good grounding of GND pads also ensures thermal heat sink. This is critical during connection, when the
real network commands the module to transmit at maximum power: proper grounding helps prevent
module overheating.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 78 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.2.2
RTC supply output (V_BCKP)
2.2.2.1
Guidelines for V_BCKP circuit design
TOBY-R2 series modules provide the V_BCKP RTC supply input/output, which can be mainly used to:

Provide RTC back-up when VCC supply is removed
If RTC timing is required to run for a time interval of T [s] when VCC supply is removed, place a capacitor with a
nominal capacitance of C [µF] at the V_BCKP pin. Choose the capacitor using the following formula:
C [µF] = (Current_Consumption [µA] x T [s]) / Voltage_Drop [V]
= 2.5 x T [s]
For example, a 100 µF capacitor can be placed at V_BCKP to provide RTC backup holding the V_BCKP voltage
within its valid range for around 40 s at 25 °C, after the VCC supply is removed. If a longer buffering time is
required, a 70 mF super-capacitor can be placed at V_BCKP, with a 4.7 k series resistor to hold the V_BCKP
voltage within its valid range for approximately 8 hours at 25 °C, after the VCC supply is removed. The purpose
of the series resistor is to limit the capacitor charging current due to the large capacitor specifications, and also
to let a fast rise time of the voltage value at the V_BCKP pin after VCC supply has been provided. These
capacitors allow the time reference to run during battery disconnection.
(a)
TOBY-R2 series
(b)
V_BCKP
C1
TOBY-R2 series
R2
(c)
TOBY-R2 series
V_BCKP
V_BCKP
D3
B3
C2
(superCap)
Figure 37: Real time clock supply (V_BCKP) application circuits: (a) using a 100 µF capacitor to let the RTC run for ~80 s after VCC
removal; (b) using a 70 mF capacitor to let RTC run for ~15 hours after VCC removal; (c) using a non-rechargeable battery
Reference
Description
Part Number - Manufacturer
C1
R2
100 µF Tantalum Capacitor
4.7 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
GRM43SR60J107M - Murata
RC0402JR-074K7L - Yageo Phycomp
C2
70 mF Capacitor
XH414H-IV01E - Seiko Instruments
Table 28: Example of components for V_BCKP buffering
If very long buffering time is required to allow the RTC time reference to run during a disconnection of the VCC
supply, then an external battery can be connected to V_BCKP pin. The battery should be able to provide a
proper nominal voltage and must never exceed the maximum operating voltage for V_BCKP (specified in the
Input characteristics of Supply/Power pins table in TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1]). The connection of the battery
to V_BCKP should be done with a suitable series resistor for a rechargeable battery, or with an appropriate
series diode for a non-rechargeable battery. The purpose of the series resistor is to limit the battery charging
current due to the battery specifications, and also to allow a fast rise time of the voltage value at the V_BCKP
pin after the VCC supply has been provided. The purpose of the series diode is to avoid a current flow from the
module V_BCKP pin to the non-rechargeable battery.
If the RTC timing is not required when the VCC supply is removed, it is not needed to connect the
V_BCKP pin to an external capacitor or battery. In this case the date and time are not updated when VCC
is disconnected. If VCC is always supplied, then the internal regulator is supplied from the main supply
and there is no need for an external component on V_BCKP.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 79 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Combining a TOBY-R2 series cellular module with a u-blox GNSS positioning receiver, the positioning receiver
VCC supply is controlled by the cellular module by means of the “GNSS supply enable” function provided by the
GPIO2 of the cellular module. In this case the V_BCKP supply output of the cellular module can be connected to
the V_BCKP backup supply input pin of the GNSS receiver to provide the supply for the positioning real time
clock and backup RAM when the VCC supply of the cellular module is within its operating range and the VCC
supply of the GNSS receiver is disabled. This enables the u-blox GNSS receiver to recover from a power
breakdown with either a hot start or a warm start (depending on the duration of the positioning VCC outage)
and to maintain the configuration settings saved in the backup RAM. Refer to section 2.6.3 for more details
regarding the application circuit with a u-blox GNSS receiver.
The internal regulator for V_BCKP is optimized for low leakage current and very light loads. Do not apply
loads which might exceed the limit for maximum available current from V_BCKP supply, as this can cause
malfunctions in the module. TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1] describes the detailed electrical characteristics.
V_BCKP supply output pin provides internal short circuit protection to limit start-up current and protect the
device in short circuit situations. No additional external short circuit protection is required.
ESD sensitivity rating of the V_BCKP supply pin is 1 kV (Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114).
Higher protection level can be required if the line is externally accessible on the application board, e.g. if
an accessible back-up battery connector is directly connected to V_BCKP pin, and it can be achieved by
mounting an ESD protection (e.g. EPCOS CA05P4S14THSG varistor array) close to the accessible point.
2.2.2.2
Guidelines for V_BCKP layout design
V_BCKP supply requires careful layout: avoid injecting noise on this voltage domain as it may affect the stability
of the internal circuitry.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 80 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.2.3
Generic digital interfaces supply output (V_INT)
2.2.3.1
Guidelines for V_INT circuit design
TOBY-R2 series provide the V_INT generic digital interfaces 1.8 V supply output, which can be mainly used to:

Indicate when the module is switched on (as described in sections 1.6.1, 1.6.2)

Pull-up SIM detection signal (see section 2.5 for more details)

Supply voltage translators to connect 1.8 V module generic digital interfaces to 3.0 V devices (e.g. see 2.6.1)

Pull-up DDC (I C) interface signals (see section 2.6.3 for more details)

Supply a 1.8 V u-blox 6 or subsequent u-blox GNSS receiver generation (see section 2.6.3 for more details)

Supply an external device, as an external 1.8 V audio codec (see section 2.7.1 for more details)
V_INT supply output pin provides internal short circuit protection to limit start-up current and protect the device
in short circuit situations. No additional external short circuit protection is required.
Do not apply loads which might exceed the limit for maximum available current from V_INT supply (see
the TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1]) as this can cause malfunctions in internal circuitry.
Since the V_INT supply is generated by an internal switching step-down regulator, the V_INT voltage
ripple can range as specified in the TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1]: it is not recommended to supply
sensitive analog circuitry without adequate filtering for digital noise.
V_INT can only be used as an output: do not connect any external supply source on V_INT.
ESD sensitivity rating of the V_INT supply pin is 1 kV (Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114).
Higher protection level could be required if the line is externally accessible and it can be achieved by
mounting an ESD protection (e.g. EPCOS CA05P4S14THSG varistor array) close to the accessible point.
It is recommended to provide direct access to the V_INT pin on the application board by means of an
accessible test point directly connected to the V_INT pin.
2.2.3.2
Guidelines for V_INT layout design
V_INT supply output is generated by an integrated switching step-down converter. Because of this, it can be a
source of noise: avoid coupling with sensitive signals.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 81 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.3
System functions interfaces
2.3.1
Module power-on (PWR_ON)
2.3.1.1 Guidelines for PWR_ON circuit design
TOBY-R2 series PWR_ON input is equipped with an internal active pull-up resistor to the V_BCKP supply as
described in Figure 38: an external pull-up resistor is not required and should not be provided.
If connecting the PWR_ON input to a push button, the pin will be externally accessible on the application
device. According to EMC/ESD requirements of the application, an additional ESD protection should be provided
close to the accessible point, as described in Figure 38 and Table 29.
ESD sensitivity rating of the PWR_ON pin is 1 kV (Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114). Higher
protection level can be required if the line is externally accessible on the application board, e.g. if an
accessible push button is directly connected to PWR_ON pin, and it can be achieved by mounting an ESD
protection (e.g. EPCOS CA05P4S14THSG varistor) close to the accessible point.
An open drain or open collector output is suitable to drive the PWR_ON input from an application processor, as
the pin is equipped with an internal active pull-up resistor to the V_BCKP supply, as described in Figure 38.
A compatible push-pull output of an application processor can also be used. In any case, take care to set the
proper level in all the possible scenarios to avoid an inappropriate module switch-on.
TOBY-R2 series
Power-on
push button
TOBY-R2 series
V_BCKP
10 k
TP
Application
Processor
Open
Drain
Output
20 PWR_ON
V_BCKP
10 k
TP
20
PWR_ON
ESD
Figure 38: PWR_ON application circuits using a push button and an open drain output of an application processor
Reference
Description
Remarks
ESD
CT0402S14AHSG - EPCOS
Varistor array for ESD protection
Table 29: Example ESD protection component for the PWR_ON application circuit
It is recommended to provide direct access to the PWR_ON pin on the application board by means of an
accessible test point directly connected to the PWR_ON pin.
2.3.1.2 Guidelines for PWR_ON layout design
The power-on circuit (PWR_ON) requires careful layout since it is the sensitive input available to switch on the
TOBY-R2 series modules. It is required to ensure that the voltage level is well defined during operation and no
transient noise is coupled on this line, otherwise the module might detect a spurious power-on request.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 82 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.3.2
Module reset (RESET_N)
2.3.2.1
Guidelines for RESET_N circuit design
TOBY-R2 series RESET_N is equipped with an internal pull-up to the V_BCKP supply as described in Figure 39.
An external pull-up resistor is not required.
If connecting the RESET_N input to a push button, the pin will be externally accessible on the application device.
According to EMC/ESD requirements of the application, an additional ESD protection device (e.g. the EPCOS
CA05P4S14THSG varistor) should be provided close to accessible point on the line connected to this pin, as
described in Figure 39 and Table 30.
ESD sensitivity rating of the RESET_N pin is 1 kV (HBM according to JESD22-A114). Higher protection
level can be required if the line is externally accessible on the application board, e.g. if an accessible push
button is directly connected to the RESET_N pin, and it can be achieved by mounting an ESD protection
(e.g. EPCOS CA05P4S14THSG varistor) close to accessible point.
An open drain output is suitable to drive the RESET_N input from an application processor as it is equipped with
an internal pull-up to V_BCKP supply, as described in Figure 39.
A compatible push-pull output of an application processor can also be used. In any case, take care to set the
proper level in all the possible scenarios to avoid an inappropriate module reset, switch-on or switch-off.
TOBY-R2 series
Open
Drain
Output
10 k
TP
TOBY-R2 series
V_BCKP
Power-on
push button
Application
Processor
23
RESET_N
V_BCKP
10 k
TP
23
RESET_N
ESD
Figure 39: RESET_N application circuits using a push button and an open drain output of an application processor
Reference
Description
Remarks
ESD
Varistor for ESD protection
CT0402S14AHSG - EPCOS
Table 30: Example of ESD protection component for the RESET_N application circuits
If the external reset function is not required by the customer application, the RESET_N input pin can be
left unconnected to external components, but it is recommended providing direct access on the
application board by means of an accessible test point directly connected to the RESET_N pin.
2.3.2.2
Guidelines for RESET_N layout design
The RESET_N circuit require careful layout due to the pin function: ensure that the voltage level is well defined
during operation and no transient noise is coupled on this line, otherwise the module might detect a spurious
reset request. It is recommended to keep the connection line to RESET_N pin as short as possible.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 83 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.3.3 Module / host configuration selection
2.3.3.1
Guidelines for HOST_SELECTx circuit design
Selection of module / host configuration over HOST_SELECT0 and HOST_SELECT1 pins is not supported:
the two pins should not be driven by the host application processor or any other external device.
TOBY-R2 series modules include two pins (HOST_SELECT0 and HOST_SELECT1) for the selection of the module
/ host application processor configuration.
Do not apply voltage to HOST_SELECT0 and HOST_SELECT1 pins before the switch-on of their supply
source (V_INT), to avoid latch-up of circuits and allow a proper boot of the module. If the external signals
connected to the cellular module cannot be tri-stated or set low, insert a multi channel digital switch (e.g.
TI SN74CB3Q16244, TS5A3159, or TS5A63157) between the two-circuit connections and set to high
impedance before V_INT switch-on.
ESD sensitivity rating of the HOST_SELECT0 and HOST_SELECT1 pins is 1 kV (HBM as per JESD22-A114).
Higher protection level could be required if the lines are externally accessible and it can be achieved by
mounting an ESD protection (e.g. EPCOS CA05P4S14THSG varistor array) close to accessible points
If the HOST_SELECT0 and HOST_SELECT1 pins are not used, they can be left unconnected on the
application board.
2.3.3.2
Guidelines for HOST_SELECTx layout design
The pins for the selection of the module / host application processor configuration (HOST_SELECT0 and
HOST_SELECT1) are generally not critical for layout.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 84 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.4
Antenna interface
TOBY-R2 series modules provide two RF interfaces for connecting the external antennas:

The ANT1 pin represents the primary RF input/output for LTE/3G/2G RF signals transmission and reception.

The ANT2 pin represents the secondary RF input for LTE Rx diversity RF signals reception.
Both the ANT1 and the ANT2 pins have a nominal characteristic impedance of 50  and must be connected to
the related antenna through a 50  transmission line to allow proper transmission / reception of RF signals.
Two antennas (one connected to ANT1 pin and one connected to ANT2 pin) must be used to support the
LTE Rx diversity radio technology. This is a required feature for LTE category 1 User Equipments (up to
10.2 Mb/s Down-Link data rate) according to 3GPP specifications.
2.4.1
Antenna RF interfaces (ANT1 / ANT2)
2.4.1.1
General guidelines for antenna selection and design
The antenna is the most critical component to be evaluated. Designers must take care of the antennas from all
perspective at the very start of the design phase when the physical dimensions of the application board are
under analysis/decision, since the RF compliance of the device integrating TOBY-R2 series modules with all the
applicable required certification schemes depends on antennas radiating performance.
LTE/3G/2G antennas are typically available in the types of linear monopole or PCB antennas such as patches or
ceramic SMT elements.

External antennas (e.g. linear monopole)

External antennas basically do not imply physical restriction to the design of the PCB where the TOBY-R2
series module is mounted.
The radiation performance mainly depends on the antennas. It is required to select antennas with
optimal radiating performance in the operating bands.
RF cables should be carefully selected to have minimum insertion losses. Additional insertion loss will be
introduced by low quality or long cable. Large insertion loss reduces both transmit and receive radiation
performance.
A high quality 50  RF connector provides proper PCB-to-RF-cable transition. It is recommended to
strictly follow the layout and cable termination guidelines provided by the connector manufacturer.
Integrated antennas (e.g. patch-like antennas):
o Internal integrated antennas imply physical restriction to the design of the PCB:
Integrated antenna excites RF currents on its counterpoise, typically the PCB ground plane of the device
that becomes part of the antenna: its dimension defines the minimum frequency that can be radiated.
Therefore, the ground plane can be reduced down to a minimum size that should be similar to the
quarter of the wavelength of the minimum frequency that has to be radiated, given that the orientation
of the ground plane relative to the antenna element must be considered.
The isolation between the primary and the secondary antennas has to be as high as possible and the
correlation between the 3D radiation patterns of the two antennas has to be as low as possible. In
general, a separation of at least a quarter wavelength between the two antennas is required to achieve
a good isolation and low pattern correlation.
As numerical example, the physical restriction to the PCB design can be considered as following:
Frequency = 750 MHz  Wavelength = 40 cm  Minimum GND plane size = 10 cm
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 85 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Radiation performance depends on the whole PCB and antenna system design, including product
mechanical design and usage. Antennas should be selected with optimal radiating performance in the
operating bands according to the mechanical specifications of the PCB and the whole product.
It is recommended to select a pair of custom antennas designed by an antennas’ manufacturer if the
required ground plane dimensions are very small (e.g. less than 6.5 cm long and 4 cm wide). The
antenna design process should begin at the start of the whole product design process
It is highly recommended to strictly follow the detailed and specific guidelines provided by the antenna
manufacturer regarding correct installation and deployment of the antenna system, including PCB layout
and matching circuitry
Further to the custom PCB and product restrictions, antennas may require tuning to obtain the required
performance for compliance with all the applicable required certification schemes. It is recommended to
consult the antenna manufacturer for the design-in guidelines for antenna matching relative to the
custom application
In both of cases, selecting external or internal antennas, these recommendations should be observed:

Select antennas providing optimal return loss (or V.S.W.R.) figure over all the operating frequencies.

Select antennas providing optimal efficiency figure over all the operating frequencies.

Select antennas providing similar efficiency for both the primary (ANT1) and the secondary (ANT2) antenna.

Select antennas providing appropriate gain figure (i.e. combined antenna directivity and efficiency figure) so
that the electromagnetic field radiation intensity do not exceed the regulatory limits specified in some
countries (e.g. by FCC in the United States, as reported in the section 4.2.2).

Select antennas capable to provide low Envelope Correlation Coefficient between the primary (ANT1) and
the secondary (ANT2) antenna: the 3D antenna radiation patterns should have lobes in different directions.
2.4.1.2
Guidelines for antenna RF interface design
Guidelines for ANT1 / ANT2 pins RF connection design
Proper transition between ANT1 / ANT2 pads and the application board PCB must be provided, implementing
the following design-in guidelines for the layout of the application PCB close to the ANT1 / ANT2 pads:

On a multilayer board, the whole layer stack below the RF connection should be free of digital lines

Increase GND keep-out (i.e. clearance, a void area) around the ANT1 / ANT2 pads, on the top layer of the
application PCB, to at least 250 µm up to adjacent pads metal definition and up to 400 µm on the area
below the module, to reduce parasitic capacitance to ground, as described in the left picture in Figure 40

Add GND keep-out (i.e. clearance, a void area) on the buried metal layer below the ANT1 / ANT2 pads if
the top-layer to buried layer dielectric thickness is below 200 µm, to reduce parasitic capacitance to ground,
as described in the right picture in Figure 40
GND clearance
on top layer
around ANT1 pad
GND clearance
on very close buried layer
below ANT1 pad
GND clearance
on top layer
around ANT2 pad
GND clearance
on very close buried layer
below ANT2 pad
Min.
250 µm
Min.
250 µm
GND
ANT1
Min. 400 µm
GND
ANT2
Min. 400 µm
Figure 40: GND keep-out area on top layer around ANT1 / ANT2 pads and on very close buried layer below ANT1 / ANT2 pads
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 86 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Guidelines for RF transmission line design
Any RF transmission line, such as the ones from the ANT1 and ANT2 pads up to the related antenna connector
or up to the related internal antenna pad, must be designed so that the characteristic impedance is as close as
possible to 50 .
RF transmission lines can be designed as a micro strip (consists of a conducting strip separated from a ground
plane by a dielectric material) or a strip line (consists of a flat strip of metal which is sandwiched between two
parallel ground planes within a dielectric material). The micro strip, implemented as a coplanar waveguide, is the
most common configuration for printed circuit board.
Figure 41 and Figure 42 provide two examples of proper 50  coplanar waveguide designs. The first example of
RF transmission line can be implemented in case of 4-layer PCB stack-up herein described, and the second
example of RF transmission line can be implemented in case of 2-layer PCB stack-up herein described.
500 µm 380 µm 500 µm
L1 Copper
35 µm
FR-4 dielectric
270 µm
L2 Copper
35 µm
FR-4 dielectric
760 µm
L3 Copper
35 µm
FR-4 dielectric
270 µm
L4 Copper
35 µm
Figure 41: Example of 50  coplanar waveguide transmission line design for the described 4-layer board layup
400 µm 1200 µm 400 µm
L1 Copper
35 µm
FR-4 dielectric
1510 µm
L2 Copper
35 µm
Figure 42: Example of 50  coplanar waveguide transmission line design for the described 2-layer board layup
If the two examples do not match the application PCB stack-up the 50  characteristic impedance calculation
can be made using the HFSS commercial finite element method solver for electromagnetic structures from Ansys
Corporation, or using freeware tools like AppCAD from Agilent (www.agilent.com) or TXLine from Applied
Wave Research (www.mwoffice.com), taking care of the approximation formulas used by the tools for the
impedance computation.
To achieve a 50  characteristic impedance, the width of the transmission line must be chosen depending on:

the thickness of the transmission line itself (e.g. 35 µm in the example of Figure 41 and Figure 42)

the thickness of the dielectric material between the top layer (where the transmission line is routed) and the
inner closer layer implementing the ground plane (e.g. 270 µm in Figure 41, 1510 µm in Figure 42)
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 87 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual

the dielectric constant of the dielectric material (e.g. dielectric constant of the FR-4 dielectric material in
Figure 41 and Figure 42)

the gap from the transmission line to the adjacent ground plane on the same layer of the transmission line
(e.g. 500 µm in Figure 41, 400 µm in Figure 42)
If the distance between the transmission line and the adjacent GND area (on the same layer) does not exceed 5
times the track width of the micro strip, use the “Coplanar Waveguide” model for the 50  calculation.
Additionally to the 50  impedance, the following guidelines are recommended for transmission lines design:

Minimize the transmission line length: the insertion loss should be minimized as much as possible, in the
order of a few tenths of a dB,

Add GND keep-out (i.e. clearance, a void area) on buried metal layers below any pad of component present
on the RF transmission lines, if top-layer to buried layer dielectric thickness is below 200 µm, to reduce
parasitic capacitance to ground,

The transmission lines width and spacing to GND must be uniform and routed as smoothly as possible: avoid
abrupt changes of width and spacing to GND,

Add GND stitching vias around transmission lines, as described in Figure 43,

Ensure solid metal connection of the adjacent metal layer on the PCB stack-up to main ground layer,
providing enough vias on the adjacent metal layer, as described in Figure 43,

Route RF transmission lines far from any noise source (as switching supplies and digital lines) and from any
sensitive circuit (as USB),

Avoid stubs on the transmission lines,

Avoid signal routing in parallel to transmission lines or crossing the transmission lines on buried metal layer,

Do not route microstrip lines below discrete component or other mechanics placed on top layer
An example of proper RF circuit design is reported in Figure 43. In this case, the ANT1 and ANT2 pins are
directly connected to SMA connectors by means of proper 50  transmission lines, designed with proper layout.
TOBY
SMA Connector
Secondary Antenna
SMA Connector
Primary Antenna
Figure 43: Example of circuit and layout for antenna RF circuits on application board
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 88 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Guidelines for RF termination design
RF terminations must provide a characteristic impedance of 50  as well as the RF transmission lines up to the RF
terminations themselves, to match the characteristic impedance of the ANT1 / ANT2 ports of the modules.
However, real antennas do not have perfect 50  load on all the supported frequency bands. Therefore, to
reduce as much as possible performance degradation due to antennas mismatch, RF terminations must provide
optimal return loss (or V.S.W.R.) figure over all the operating frequencies, as summarized in Table 7 and Table 8.
If external antennas are used, the antenna connectors represent the RF termination on the PCB:


Use suitable 50  connectors providing proper PCB-to-RF-cable transition.
Strictly follow the connector manufacturer’s recommended layout, for example:

SMA Pin-Through-Hole connectors require GND keep-out (i.e. clearance, a void area) on all the layers
around the central pin up to annular pads of the four GND posts, as shown in Figure 43
U.FL surface mounted connectors require no conductive traces (i.e. clearance, a void area) in the area
below the connector between the GND land pads.
Cut out the GND layer under RF connectors and close to buried vias, to remove stray capacitance and thus
keep the RF line 50 , e.g. the active pad of UFL connectors needs to have a GND keep-out (i.e. clearance, a
void area) at least on first inner layer to reduce parasitic capacitance to ground.
If integrated antennas are used, the RF terminations are represented by the integrated antennas themselves. The
following guidelines should be followed:

Use antennas designed by an antenna manufacturer, providing the best possible return loss (or V.S.W.R.).

Provide a ground plane large enough according to the relative integrated antenna requirements. The ground
plane of the application PCB can be reduced down to a minimum size that must be similar to one quarter of
wavelength of the minimum frequency that has to be radiated. As numerical example,
Frequency = 750 MHz  Wavelength = 40 cm  Minimum GND plane size = 10 cm

It is highly recommended to strictly follow the detailed and specific guidelines provided by the antenna
manufacturer regarding correct installation and deployment of the antenna system, including PCB layout
and matching circuitry.

Further to the custom PCB and product restrictions, antennas may require a tuning to comply with all the
applicable required certification schemes. It is recommended to consult the antenna manufacturer for the
design-in guidelines for the antenna matching relative to the custom application.
Additionally, these recommendations regarding the antenna system placement must be followed:

Do not place antennas within closed metal case.

Do not place the antennas in close vicinity to end user since the emitted radiation in human tissue is limited
by regulatory requirements.

Place the antennas far from sensitive analog systems or employ countermeasures to reduce EMC issues.

Take care of interaction between co-located RF systems since the LTE/3G/2G transmitted power may interact
or disturb the performance of companion systems.

Place the two LTE antennas providing low Envelope Correlation Coefficient (ECC) between primary (ANT1)
and secondary (ANT2) antenna: the antenna 3D radiation patterns should have lobes in different directions.
The ECC between primary and secondary antenna needs to be enough low to comply with the radiated
performance requirements specified by related certification schemes, as indicated in Table 9.

Place the two LTE antennas providing enough high isolation (see Table 9) between primary (ANT1) and
secondary (ANT2) antenna. The isolation depends on the distance between antennas (separation of at least
a quarter wavelength required for good isolation), antenna type (using antennas with different polarization
improves isolation), antenna 3D radiation patterns (uncorrelated patterns improve isolation).
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 89 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Examples of antennas
Table 31 lists some examples of possible internal on-board surface-mount antennas.
Manufacturer
Part Number
Product Name
Description
Taoglas
PA.710.A
Warrior
Taoglas
PA.711.A
Warrior II
Taoglas
PCS.06.A
Havok
Antenova
SR4L002
Lucida
GSM / WCDMA / LTE SMD Antenna
698..960 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2300..2400 MHz, 2490..2690 MHz
40.0 x 6.0 x 5.0 mm
GSM / WCDMA / LTE SMD Antenna
Pairs with the Taoglas PA.710.A Warrior for LTE MIMO applications
698..960 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2300..2400 MHz, 2490..2690 MHz
40.0 x 6.0 x 5.0 mm
GSM / WCDMA / LTE SMD Antenna
698..960 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2500..2690 MHz
42.0 x 10.0 x 3.0 mm
GSM / WCDMA / LTE SMD Antenna
698..960 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2300..2400 MHz, 2490..2690 MHz
35.0 x 8.5 x 3.2 mm
Table 31: Examples of internal surface-mount antennas
Table 32 lists some examples of possible internal off-board PCB-type antennas with cable and connector.
Manufacturer
Part Number
Taoglas
FXUB63.07.0150C
Product Name
Taoglas
FXUB66.07.0150C
Taoglas
FXUB70.A.07.C.001
Ethertronics
5001537
Prestta
EAD
FSQS35241-UF-10
SQ7
Maximus
Description
GSM / WCDMA / LTE PCB Antenna with cable and U.FL
698..960 MHz, 1575.42 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2400..2690 MHz
96.0 x 21.0 mm
GSM / WCDMA / LTE PCB Antenna with cable and U.FL
698..960 MHz, 1390..1435 MHz, 1575.42 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz,
2400..2700 MHz, 3400..3600 MHz, 4800..6000 MHz
120.2 x 50.4 mm
GSM / WCDMA / LTE PCB MIMO Antenna with cables and U.FL
698..960 MHz, 1575.42 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2400..2690 MHz
182.2 x 21.2 mm
GSM / WCDMA / LTE PCB Antenna with cable
704..960 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2300..2400 MHz, 2500..2690 MHz
80.0 x 18.0 mm
GSM / WCDMA / LTE PCB Antenna with cable and U.FL
690..960 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2500..2700 MHz
110.0 x 21.0 mm
Table 32: Examples of internal antennas with cable and connector
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 90 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Table 33 lists some examples of possible external antennas.
Manufacturer
Part Number
Product Name
Description
Taoglas
GSA.8827.A.101111
Phoenix
Taoglas
TG.30.8112
Taoglas
MA241.BI.001
GSM / WCDMA / LTE adhesive-mount antenna with cable and SMA(M)
698..960 MHz, 1575.42 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2490..2690 MHz
105 x 30 x 7.7 mm
GSM / WCDMA / LTE swivel dipole antenna with SMA(M)
698..960 MHz, 1575.42 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2400..2700 MHz
148.6 x 49 x 10 mm
GSM / WCDMA / LTE MIMO 2in1 adhesive-mount combination antenna
waterproof IP67 rated with cable and SMA(M)
698..960 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2400..2700 MHz
205.8 x 58 x 12.4 mm
Laird Tech.
TRA6927M3PW-001
Laird Tech.
CMS69273
Laird Tech.
OC69271-FNM
Laird Tech.
CMD69273-30NM
Pulse Electronics
WA700/2700SMA
Genesis
GSM / WCDMA / LTE screw-mount antenna with N-type(F)
698..960 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2300..2700 MHz
83.8 x Ø 36.5 mm
GSM / WCDMA / LTE ceiling-mount antenna with cable and N-type(F)
698..960 MHz, 1575.42 MHz, 1710..2700 MHz
86 x Ø 199 mm
GSM / WCDMA / LTE pole-mount antenna with N-type(M)
698..960 MHz, 1710..2690 MHz
248 x Ø 24.5 mm
GSM / WCDMA / LTE ceiling-mount MIMO antenna with cables & N-type(M)
698..960 MHz, 1710..2700 MHz
43.5 x Ø 218.7 mm
GSM / WCDMA / LTE clip-mount MIMO antenna with cables and SMA(M)
698..960 MHz,1710..2700 MHz
149 x 127 x 5.1 mm
Table 33: Examples of external antennas
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 91 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.4.2
Antenna detection interface (ANT_DET)
2.4.2.1
Guidelines for ANT_DET circuit design
Figure 44 and Table 34 describe the recommended schematic / components for the antennas detection circuit
that must be provided on the application board and for the diagnostic circuit that must be provided on the
antennas’ assembly to achieve primary and secondary antenna detection functionality.
TOBY-R2 series
ANT2 87
Z0 = 50 ohm
C3
J2
L2
ANT1 81
Z0 = 50 ohm
J1
L4
Radiating
Element
Diagnostic
Circuit
R3
C4
Antenna Cable
L3
L1
ANT_DET 75
C5
Antenna Cable
Z0 = 50 ohm
Z0 = 50 ohm
C2
Radiating
Element
Z0 = 50 ohm
Z0 = 50 ohm
Diagnostic
Circuit
Secondary Antenna Assembly
R2
R1
C1
D1
Application Board
Primary Antenna Assembly
Figure 44: Suggested schematic for antenna detection circuit on application board and diagnostic circuit on antennas assembly
Reference
Description
Part Number - Manufacturer
C1
C2, C3
27 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V
33 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V
GRM1555C1H270J - Murata
GRM1555C1H330J - Murata
D1
Very Low Capacitance ESD Protection
PESD0402-140 - Tyco Electronics
L1, L2
R1
68 nH Multilayer Inductor 0402 (SRF ~1 GHz)
LQG15HS68NJ02 - Murata
RK73H1ETTP1002F - KOA Speer
J1, J2
SMA Connector 50  Through Hole Jack
22 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 25 V
SMA6251A1-3GT50G-50 - Amphenol
68 nH Multilayer Inductor 0402 (SRF ~1 GHz)
LQG15HS68NJ02 - Murata
Various Manufacturers
C4, C5
L3, L4
R2, R3
10 k Resistor 0402 1% 0.063 W
15 k Resistor for Diagnostic
GRM1555C1H220J - Murata
Table 34: Suggested components for antenna detection circuit on application board and diagnostic circuit on antennas assembly
The antenna detection circuit and diagnostic circuit suggested in Figure 44 and Table 34 are explained here:

When antenna detection is forced by AT+UANTR command, ANT_DET generates a DC current measuring
the resistance (R2 // R3) from antenna connectors (J1, J2) provided on the application board to GND.

DC blocking capacitors are needed at the ANT1 / ANT2 pins (C2, C3) and at the antenna radiating element
(C4, C5) to decouple the DC current generated by the ANT_DET pin.

Choke inductors with a Self Resonance Frequency (SRF) in the range of 1 GHz are needed in series at the
ANT_DET pin (L1, L2) and in series at the diagnostic resistor (L3, L4), to avoid a reduction of the RF
performance of the system, improving the RF isolation of the load resistor.

Additional components (R1, C1 and D1 in Figure 44) are needed at the ANT_DET pin as ESD protection

The ANT1 / ANT2 pins must be connected to the antenna connector by means of a transmission line with
nominal characteristics impedance as close as possible to 50 .
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 92 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
The DC impedance at RF port for some antennas may be a DC open (e.g. linear monopole) or a DC short to
reference GND (e.g. PIFA antenna). For those antennas, without the diagnostic circuit of Figure 44, the measured
DC resistance is always at the limits of the measurement range (respectively open or short), and there is no
means to distinguish between a defect on antenna path with similar characteristics (respectively: removal of
linear antenna or RF cable shorted to GND for PIFA antenna).
Furthermore, any other DC signal injected to the RF connection from ANT connector to radiating element will
alter the measurement and produce invalid results for antenna detection.
It is recommended to use an antenna with a built-in diagnostic resistor in the range from 5 k to 30 k
to assure good antenna detection functionality and avoid a reduction of module RF performance. The
choke inductor should exhibit a parallel Self Resonance Frequency (SRF) in the range of 1 GHz to improve
the RF isolation of load resistor.
For example:
Consider an antenna with built-in DC load resistor of 15 k. Using the +UANTR AT command, the module
reports the resistance value evaluated from the antenna connector provided on the application board to GND:

Reported values close to the used diagnostic resistor nominal value (i.e. values from 13 k to 17 k if a
15 k diagnostic resistor is used) indicate that the antenna is properly connected.

Values close to the measurement range maximum limit (approximately 50 k) or an open-circuit
“over range” report (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]) means that that the antenna is not connected or
the RF cable is broken.

Reported values below the measurement range minimum limit (1 k) highlights a short to GND at antenna
or along the RF cable.

Measurement inside the valid measurement range and outside the expected range may indicate an improper
connection, damaged antenna or wrong value of antenna load resistor for diagnostic.

Reported value could differ from the real resistance value of the diagnostic resistor mounted inside the
antenna assembly due to antenna cable length, antenna cable capacity and the used measurement method.
If the primary / secondary antenna detection function is not required by the customer application, the
ANT_DET pin can be left not connected and the ANT1 / ANT2 pins can be directly connected to the
related antenna connector by means of a 50  transmission line as described in Figure 43.
2.4.2.2
Guidelines for ANT_DET layout design
The recommended layout for the primary antenna detection circuit to be provided on the application board to
achieve the primary antenna detection functionality, implementing the recommended schematic described in
Figure 44 and Table 34, is explained here:

The ANT1 / ANT2 pins have to be connected to the antenna connector by means of a 50  transmission
line, implementing the design guidelines described in section 2.4.1 and the recommendations of the SMA
connector manufacturer.

DC blocking capacitor at ANT1 / ANT2 pins (C2, C3) has to be placed in series to the 50  RF line.

The ANT_DET pin has to be connected to the 50  transmission line by means of a sense line.

Choke inductors in series at the ANT_DET pin (L1, L2) have to be placed so that one pad is on the 50 
transmission line and the other pad represents the start of the sense line to the ANT_DET pin.

The additional components (R1, C1 and D1) on the ANT_DET line have to be placed as ESD protection.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 93 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.5
2.5.1
SIM interface
Guidelines for SIM circuit design
Guidelines for SIM cards, SIM connectors and SIM chips selection
The ISO/IEC 7816, the ETSI TS 102 221 and the ETSI TS 102 671 specifications define the physical, electrical and
functional characteristics of Universal Integrated Circuit Cards (UICC), which contains the Subscriber
Identification Module (SIM) integrated circuit that securely stores all the information needed to identify and
authenticate subscribers over the LTE/3G/2G network.
Removable UICC / SIM card contacts mapping is defined by ISO/IEC 7816 and ETSI TS 102 221 as follows:

Contact C1 = VCC (Supply)
 It must be connected to VSIM

Contact C2 = RST (Reset)
 It must be connected to SIM_RST

Contact C3 = CLK (Clock)
 It must be connected to SIM_CLK

Contact C4 = AUX1 (Auxiliary contact)
 It must be left not connected

Contact C5 = GND (Ground)
 It must be connected to GND

Contact C6 = VPP (Programming supply)
 It can be left not connected

Contact C7 = I/O (Data input/output)
 It must be connected to SIM_IO
 Contact C8 = AUX2 (Auxiliary contact)
 It must be left not connected
A removable SIM card can have 6 contacts (C1, C2, C3, C5, C6, C7) or 8 contacts, also including the auxiliary
contacts C4 and C8. Only 6 contacts are required and must be connected to the module SIM interface.
Removable SIM cards are suitable for applications requiring a change of SIM card during the product lifetime.
A SIM card holder can have 6 or 8 positions if a mechanical card presence detector is not provided, or it can
have 6+2 or 8+2 positions if two additional pins relative to the normally-open mechanical switch integrated in
the SIM connector for the mechanical card presence detection are provided. Select a SIM connector providing
6+2 or 8+2 positions if the optional SIM detection feature is required by the custom application, otherwise a
connector without integrated mechanical presence switch can be selected.
Solderable UICC / SIM chip contact mapping (M2M UICC Form Factor) is defined by ETSI TS 102 671 as:

Case Pin 8 = UICC Contact C1 = VCC (Supply)
 It must be connected to VSIM

Case Pin 7 = UICC Contact C2 = RST (Reset)
 It must be connected to SIM_RST

Case Pin 6 = UICC Contact C3 = CLK (Clock)
 It must be connected to SIM_CLK

Case Pin 5 = UICC Contact C4 = AUX1 (Aux.contact)  It must be left not connected

Case Pin 1 = UICC Contact C5 = GND (Ground)
 It must be connected to GND

Case Pin 2 = UICC Contact C6 = VPP (Progr. supply)
 It can be left not connected

Case Pin 3 = UICC Contact C7 = I/O (Data I/O)
 It must be connected to SIM_IO

Case Pin 4 = UICC Contact C8 = AUX2 (Aux. contact)  It must be left not connected
A solderable SIM chip has 8 contacts and can also include the auxiliary contacts C4 and C8 for other uses, but
only 6 contacts are required and must be connected to the module SIM card interface as described above.
Solderable SIM chips are suitable for M2M applications where it is not required to change the SIM once installed.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 94 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Guidelines for single SIM card connection without detection
A removable SIM card placed in a SIM card holder has to be connected to the SIM card interface of TOBY-R2
series modules as described in Figure 45, where the optional SIM detection feature is not implemented.
Follow these guidelines to connect the module to a SIM connector without SIM presence detection:

Connect the UICC / SIM contacts C1 (VCC) to the VSIM pin of the module.

Connect the UICC / SIM contact C7 (I/O) to the SIM_IO pin of the module.

Connect the UICC / SIM contact C3 (CLK) to the SIM_CLK pin of the module.

Connect the UICC / SIM contact C2 (RST) to the SIM_RST pin of the module.

Connect the UICC / SIM contact C5 (GND) to ground.

Provide a 100 nF bypass capacitor (e.g. Murata GRM155R71C104K) on SIM supply line, close to the relative
pad of the SIM connector, to prevent digital noise.

Provide a bypass capacitor of about 22 pF to 47 pF (e.g. Murata GRM1555C1H470J) on each SIM line, very
close to each related pad of the SIM connector, to prevent RF coupling especially in case the RF antenna is
placed closer than 10 - 30 cm from the SIM card holder.

Provide a very low capacitance (i.e. less than 10 pF) ESD protection (e.g. Tyco PESD0402-140) on each
externally accessible SIM line, close to each relative pad of the SIM connector. ESD sensitivity rating of the
SIM interface pins is 1 kV (HBM). So that, according to EMC/ESD requirements of the custom application,
higher protection level can be required if the lines are externally accessible on the application device.

Limit capacitance and series resistance on each SIM signal to match the SIM requirements (27.7 ns is the
maximum allowed rise time on clock line, 1.0 µs is the maximum allowed rise time on data and reset lines).
SIM CARD
HOLDER
TOBY-R2 series
VPP (C6)
VSIM 59
SIM_IO
VCC (C1)
57
C C C C
5 6 7 8
IO (C7)
SIM_CLK 56
CLK (C3)
SIM_RST 58
RST (C2)
C1
C2
C3 C4
C5
GND (C5)
D1 D2 D3 D4
C C C C
1 2 3 4
SIM Card
Bottom View
(contacts side)
J1
Figure 45: Application circuits for the connection to a single removable SIM card, with SIM detection not implemented
Reference
Description
Part Number - Manufacturer
C1, C2, C3, C4
47 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V
GRM1555C1H470JA01 - Murata
C5
D1, D2, D3, D4
100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V
Very Low Capacitance ESD Protection
GRM155R71C104KA01 - Murata
PESD0402-140 - Tyco Electronics
J1
SIM Card Holder, 6 p, without card presence switch
Various manufacturers, as C707 10M006 136 2 - Amphenol
Table 35: Example of components for the connection to a single removable SIM card, with SIM detection not implemented
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 95 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Guidelines for single SIM chip connection
A solderable SIM chip (M2M UICC Form Factor) has to be connected the SIM card interface of TOBY-R2 series
modules as described in Figure 46.
Follow these guidelines to connect the module to a solderable SIM chip without SIM presence detection:

Connect the UICC / SIM contacts C1 (VCC) to the VSIM pin of the module.

Connect the UICC / SIM contact C7 (I/O) to the SIM_IO pin of the module.

Connect the UICC / SIM contact C3 (CLK) to the SIM_CLK pin of the module.

Connect the UICC / SIM contact C2 (RST) to the SIM_RST pin of the module.

Connect the UICC / SIM contact C5 (GND) to ground.

Provide a 100 nF bypass capacitor (e.g. Murata GRM155R71C104K) at the SIM supply line close to the
relative pad of the SIM chip, to prevent digital noise.

Provide a bypass capacitor of about 22 pF to 47 pF (e.g. Murata GRM1555C1H470J) on each SIM line, to
prevent RF coupling especially in case the RF antenna is placed closer than 10 - 30 cm from the SIM lines.

Limit capacitance and series resistance on each SIM signal to match the SIM requirements (27.7 ns is the
maximum allowed rise time on clock line, 1.0 µs is the maximum allowed rise time on data and reset lines).
TOBY-R2 series
SIM CHIP
VSIM 59
SIM_IO 57
SIM_CLK
56
SIM_RST 58
C1
C2
C3 C4
C5
VPP (C6)
VCC (C1)
IO (C7)
CLK (C3)
RST (C2)
GND (C5)
8 C1
C5 1
7 C2
C6 2
6 C3
C7 3
5 C4
C8 4
SIM Chip
Bottom View
(contacts side)
U1
Figure 46: Application circuits for the connection to a single solderable SIM chip, with SIM detection not implemented
Reference
Description
Part Number - Manufacturer
C1, C2, C3, C4
C5
47 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V
100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V
GRM1555C1H470JA01 - Murata
GRM155R71C104KA01 - Murata
U1
SIM chip (M2M UICC Form Factor)
Various Manufacturers
Table 36: Example of components for the connection to a single solderable SIM chip, with SIM detection not implemented
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 96 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Guidelines for single SIM card connection with detection
A removable SIM card placed in a SIM card holder must be connected to the SIM card interface of TOBY-R2
series modules as described in Figure 47, where the optional SIM card detection feature is implemented.
Follow these guidelines to connect the module to a SIM connector implementing SIM presence detection:

Connect the UICC / SIM contacts C1 (VCC) to the VSIM pin of the module.

Connect the UICC / SIM contact C7 (I/O) to the SIM_IO pin of the module.

Connect the UICC / SIM contact C3 (CLK) to the SIM_CLK pin of the module.

Connect the UICC / SIM contact C2 (RST) to the SIM_RST pin of the module.

Connect the UICC / SIM contact C5 (GND) to ground.

Connect one pin of the normally-open mechanical switch integrated in the SIM connector (e.g. the SW2 pin
as described in Figure 47) to the GPIO5 input pin of the module.

Connect the other pin of the normally-open mechanical switch integrated in the SIM connector (e.g. the
SW1 pin as described in Figure 47) to the V_INT 1.8 V supply output of the module by means of a strong
(e.g. 1 k) pull-up resistor, as the R1 resistor in Figure 47.

Provide a weak (e.g. 470 k) pull-down resistor at the SIM detection line, as the R2 resistor in Figure 47

Provide a 100 nF bypass capacitor (e.g. Murata GRM155R71C104K) at the SIM supply line, close to the
related pad of the SIM connector, to prevent digital noise.

Provide a bypass capacitor of about 22 pF to 47 pF (e.g. Murata GRM1555C1H470J) on each SIM line, very
close to each related pad of the SIM connector, to prevent RF coupling especially in case the RF antenna is
placed closer than 10 - 30 cm from the SIM card holder.

Provide a very low capacitance (i.e. less than 10 pF) ESD protection (e.g. Tyco PESD0402-140) on each
externally accessible SIM line, close to each related pad of the SIM connector: ESD sensitivity rating of the
SIM interface pins is 1 kV (HBM), so that, according to the EMC/ESD requirements of the custom application,
higher protection level can be required if the lines are externally accessible on the application device.

Limit capacitance and series resistance on each SIM signal to match the SIM requirements (27.7 ns is the
maximum allowed rise time on clock line, 1.0 µs is the maximum allowed rise time on data and reset lines).
SIM CARD
HOLDER
TOBY-R2 series
V_INT
TP
R1
GPIO5 60
R2
VSIM 59
SW1
SW2
VPP (C6)
VCC (C1)
SIM_IO 57
C C C C
5 6 7 8
IO (C7)
SIM_CLK 56
CLK (C3)
SIM_RST 58
RST (C2)
C1 C2 C3 C4
C5
GND (C5)
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
C C C C
1 2 3 4
SIM Card
Bottom View
(contacts side)
J1
Figure 47: Application circuit for the connection to a single removable SIM card, with SIM detection implemented
Reference
Description
Part Number - Manufacturer
C1, C2, C3, C4
C5
47 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V
100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V
GRM1555C1H470JA01 - Murata
GRM155R71C104KA01 - Murata
D1, … , D6
R1
Very Low Capacitance ESD Protection
PESD0402-140 - Tyco Electronics
RC0402JR-071KL - Yageo Phycomp
R2
470 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
SIM Card Holder, 6 + 2 p, with card presence switch
J1
1 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
RC0402JR-07470KL- Yageo Phycomp
Various manufacturers, as CCM03-3013LFT R102 - C&K
Table 37: Example of components for the connection to a single removable SIM card, with SIM detection implemented
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 97 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Guidelines for dual SIM card / chip connection
Two SIM card / chip can be connected to the SIM interface of TOBY-R2 series modules as described in Figure 48.
TOBY-R2 series modules do not support the usage of two SIM at the same time, but two SIM can be populated
on the application board, providing a proper switch to connect only the first or only the second SIM at a time to
the SIM interface of the modules, as described in Figure 48.
TOBY-R2 series modules support SIM hot insertion / removal on the GPIO5 pin, to enable / disable SIM interface
upon detection of external SIM card physical insertion / removal: if the feature is enabled using the specific AT
commands (see sections 1.8.2 and 1.11, and u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +UGPIOC, +UDCONF=50
commands), the switch from first SIM to the second SIM can be properly done when a Low logic level is present
on the GPIO5 pin (“SIM not inserted” = SIM interface not enabled), without the necessity of a module re-boot,
so that the SIM interface will be re-enabled by the module to use the second SIM when a high logic level is reapplied on the GPIO5 pin.
In the application circuit example represented in Figure 48, the application processor will drive the SIM switch
using its own GPIO to properly select the SIM that is used by the module. Another GPIO may be used to handle
the SIM hot insertion / removal function of TOBY-R2 series modules, which can also be handled by other external
circuits or by the cellular module GPIO according to the application requirements.
The dual SIM connection circuit described in Figure 48 can be implemented for SIM chips as well, providing
proper connection between SIM switch and SIM chip as described in Figure 46.
If it is required to switch between more than 2 SIM, a circuit similar to the one described in Figure 48 can be
implemented: in case of 4 SIM circuit, using proper 4-throw switch instead of the suggested 2-throw switches.
Follow these guidelines to connect the module to two external SIM connectors:

Use a proper low on resistance (i.e. few ohms) and low on capacitance (i.e. few pF) 2-throw analog switch
(e.g. Fairchild FSA2567) as SIM switch to ensure high-speed data transfer according to SIM requirements.

Connect the contacts C1 (VCC) of the two UICC / SIM to the VSIM pin of the module by means of a proper
2-throw analog switch (e.g. Fairchild FSA2567).

Connect the contact C7 (I/O) of the two UICC / SIM to the SIM_IO pin of the module by means of a proper
2-throw analog switch (e.g. Fairchild FSA2567).

Connect the contact C3 (CLK) of the two UICC / SIM to the SIM_CLK pin of the module by means of a
proper 2-throw analog switch (e.g. Fairchild FSA2567).

Connect the contact C2 (RST) of the two UICC / SIM to the SIM_RST pin of the module by means of a
proper 2-throw analog switch (e.g. Fairchild FSA2567).

Connect the contact C5 (GND) of the two UICC / SIM to ground.

Provide a 100 nF bypass capacitor (e.g. Murata GRM155R71C104K) at the SIM supply (VSIM), close to the
related pad of the two SIM connectors, to prevent digital noise.

Provide a bypass capacitor of about 22 pF to 47 pF (e.g. Murata GRM1555C1H470J) on each SIM line, very
close to each related pad of the two SIM connectors, to prevent RF coupling especially in case the RF
antenna is placed closer than 10 - 30 cm from the SIM card holders.

Provide a very low capacitance (i.e. less than 10 pF) ESD protection (e.g. Tyco Electronics PESD0402-140) on
each externally accessible SIM line, close to each pad of the two SIM connectors, according to the EMC/ESD
requirements of the custom application.

Limit capacitance and series resistance on each SIM signal to match the SIM requirements (27.7 ns is the
maximum allowed rise time on clock line, 1.0 µs is the maximum allowed rise time on data and reset lines).
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 98 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
FIRST
SIM CARD
TOBY-R2 series
VSIM 59
3V8
VPP (C6)
4PDT
C11
Analog
Switch
VCC
1VSIM
VSIM
2VSIM
VCC (C1)
SIM_IO 57
DAT
1DAT
2DAT
SIM_CLK 56
CLK
1CLK
2CLK
RST
1RST
2RST
SIM_RST 58
IO (C7)
CLK (C3)
RST (C2)
C1
C2
C3 C4
GND (C5)
C5
D1 D2 D3 D4
J1
SECOND
SIM CARD
VPP (C6)
SEL
GND
VCC (C1)
U1
IO (C7)
CLK (C3)
Application
Processor
RST (C2)
GPIO
R1
C6
C7
C8 C9 C10
GND (C5)
D5 D6 D7 D8
J2
Figure 48: Application circuit for the connection to two removable SIM cards, with SIM detection not implemented
Reference
Description
Part Number – Manufacturer
C1 – C4, C6 – C9
33 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 25 V
GRM1555C1H330JZ01 – Murata
C5, C10, C11
D1 – D8
100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V
Very Low Capacitance ESD Protection
GRM155R71C104KA01 – Murata
PESD0402-140 - Tyco Electronics
R1
47 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
SIM Card Holder, 6 + 2 p., with card presence switch
RC0402JR-0747KL- Yageo Phycomp
4PDT Analog Switch,
with Low On-Capacitance and Low On-Resistance
FSA2567 - Fairchild Semiconductor
J1, J2
U1
CCM03-3013LFT R102 - C&K Components
Table 38: Example of components for the connection to two removable SIM cards, with SIM detection not implemented
2.5.2
Guidelines for SIM layout design
The layout of the SIM card interface lines (VSIM, SIM_CLK, SIM_IO, SIM_RST may be critical if the SIM card is
placed far away from the TOBY-R2 series modules or in close proximity to the RF antenna: these two cases
should be avoided or at least mitigated as described below.
In the first case, the long connection can cause the radiation of some harmonics of the digital data frequency as
any other digital interface. It is recommended to keep the traces short and avoid coupling with RF line or
sensitive analog inputs.
In the second case, the same harmonics can be picked up and create self-interference that can reduce the
sensitivity of LTE/3G/2G receiver channels whose carrier frequency is coincidental with harmonic frequencies. It is
strongly recommended to place the RF bypass capacitors suggested in Figure 45 near the SIM connector.
In addition, since the SIM card is typically accessed by the end user, it can be subjected to ESD discharges. Add
adequate ESD protection as suggested to protect module SIM pins near the SIM connector.
Limit capacitance and series resistance on each SIM signal to match the SIM specifications. The connections
should always be kept as short as possible.
Avoid coupling with any sensitive analog circuit, since the SIM signals can cause the radiation of some harmonics
of the digital data frequency.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 99 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.6
Data communication interfaces
2.6.1
UART interface
2.6.1.1
Guidelines for UART circuit design
Providing the full RS-232 functionality (using the complete V.24 link)
If RS-232 compatible signal levels are needed, two different external voltage translators can be used to provide
full RS-232 (9 lines) functionality: e.g. using the Texas Instruments SN74AVC8T245PW for the translation from
1.8 V to 3.3 V, and the Maxim MAX3237E for the translation from 3.3 V to RS-232 compatible signal level.
If a 1.8 V Application Processor (DTE) is used and complete RS-232 functionality is required, then the complete
1.8 V UART interface of the module (DCE) should be connected to a 1.8 V DTE, as described in Figure 49.
Application Processor
(1.8V DTE)
TOBY-R2 series
(1.8V DCE)
TxD
RxD
0Ω
TP
0Ω
TP
RTS
CTS
0Ω
DTR
TP
DSR
RI
0Ω
DCD
TP
16
TXD
17
RXD
14
RTS
15
CTS
13
DTR
10
DSR
11
RI
12
DCD
GND
GND
Figure 49: UART interface application circuit with complete V.24 link in DTE/DCE serial communication (1.8V DTE)
If a 3.0 V Application Processor (DTE) is used, then it is recommended to connect the 1.8 V UART interface of the
module (DCE) by means of appropriate unidirectional voltage translators using the module V_INT output as
1.8 V supply for the voltage translators on the module side, as described in Figure 50.
Application Processor
(3.0V DTE)
Unidirectional
Voltage Translator
3V0
VCC
C1
VCCA
DIR1
DIR3
VCCB
TOBY-R2 series
(1.8V DCE)
1V8
TP
C2
0Ω
TP
0Ω
TP
V_INT
16
TXD
17
RXD
TxD
A1
B1
RxD
A2
B2
RTS
A3
B3
14
RTS
CTS
A4
B4
15
CTS
13
DTR
10
DSR
11
RI
12
DCD
DIR2
DIR4
OE
GND
U1
Unidirectional
Voltage Translator
3V0
C3
VCCA
VCCB
DIR1
DTR
A1
B1
DSR
A2
B2
RI
A3
B3
DCD
A4
GND
DIR2
DIR3
DIR4
B4
OE
GND
1V8
C4
0Ω
0Ω
TP
TP
GND
U2
Figure 50: UART interface application circuit with complete V.24 link in DTE/DCE serial communication (3.0 V DTE)
Reference
Description
Part Number - Manufacturer
C1, C2, C3, C4
U1, U2
100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V
Unidirectional Voltage Translator
GRM155R61A104KA01 - Murata
SN74AVC4T77414 - Texas Instruments
Table 39: Component for UART application circuit with complete V.24 link in DTE/DCE serial communication (3.0 V DTE)
14
Voltage translator providing partial power down feature so that the DTE 3.0 V supply can be also ramped up before V_INT 1.8 V supply
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 100 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Providing the TXD, RXD, RTS, CTS and DTR lines only (not using the complete V.24 link)
If the functionality of the DSR, DCD and RI lines is not required, or the lines are not available:

Leave DSR, DCD and RI lines of the module floating, with a test-point on DCD
If RS-232 compatible signal levels are needed, two different external voltage translators (e.g. Maxim MAX3237E
and Texas Instruments SN74AVC4T774) can be used. The Texas Instruments chips provide the translation from
1.8 V to 3.3 V, while the Maxim chip provides the translation from 3.3 V to RS-232 compatible signal level.
Figure 51 describes the circuit that should be implemented as if a 1.8 V Application Processor (DTE) is used,
given that the DTE will behave properly regardless DSR input setting.
Application Processor
(1.8V DTE)
TOBY-R2 series
(1.8V DCE)
TxD
RxD
0Ω
TP
0Ω
TP
RTS
CTS
0Ω
DTR
TP
DSR
RI
TP
DCD
16
TXD
17
RXD
14
RTS
15
CTS
13
DTR
10
DSR
11
RI
12
DCD
GND
GND
Figure 51: UART interface application circuit with partial V.24 link (6-wire) in the DTE/DCE serial communication (1.8 V DTE)
If a 3.0 V Application Processor (DTE) is used, then it is recommended to connect the 1.8 V UART interface of the
module (DCE) by means of appropriate unidirectional voltage translators using the module V_INT output as
1.8 V supply for the voltage translators on the module side, as described in Figure 52, given that the DTE will
behave properly regardless DSR input setting.
Application Processor
(3.0V DTE)
VCC
Unidirectional
Voltage Translator
3V0
VCCA
DIR1
DIR3
C1
TOBY-R2 series
(1.8V DCE)
1V8
VCCB
C2
0Ω
TP
0Ω
TP
V_INT
16
TXD
17
RXD
TxD
A1
B1
RxD
A2
B2
RTS
A3
B3
14 RTS
CTS
A4
B4
15
CTS
13
DTR
10
DSR
11
RI
12
DCD
DIR2
DIR4
OE
GND
U1
Unidirectional
Voltage Translator
3V0
C3
DTR
VCCA
DIR1
A1
A2
DSR
VCCB
DIR2
B1
B2
1V8
C4
0Ω
OE
GND
RI
DCD
U2
GND
TP
TP
GND
Figure 52: UART interface application circuit with partial V.24 link (6-wire) in DTE/DCE serial communication (3.0 V DTE)
Reference
Description
Part Number - Manufacturer
C1, C2, C3, C4
100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V
GRM155R61A104KA01 - Murata
U1
U2
Unidirectional Voltage Translator
Unidirectional Voltage Translator
SN74AVC4T77415 - Texas Instruments
SN74AVC2T24515 - Texas Instruments
Table 40: Component for UART application circuit with partial V.24 link (6-wire) in DTE/DCE serial communication (3.0 V DTE)
15
Voltage translator providing partial power down feature so that the DTE 3.0 V supply can be also ramped up before V_INT 1.8 V supply
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 101 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Providing the TXD, RXD, RTS and CTS lines only (not using the complete V.24 link)
If the functionality of the DSR, DCD, RI and DTR lines is not required in, or the lines are not available:

Connect the module DTR input to GND using a 0  series resistor, since it may be useful to set DTR active if
not specifically handled (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], &D, S0, +CSGT, +CNMI AT commands)

Leave DSR, DCD and RI lines of the module floating, with a test-point on DCD
If RS-232 compatible signal levels are needed, the Maxim MAX13234E voltage level translator can be used. This
chip translates voltage levels from 1.8 V (module side) to the RS-232 standard.
If a 1.8 V Application Processor is used, the circuit should be implemented as described in Figure 53.
Application Processor
(1.8V DTE)
TOBY-R2 series
(1.8V DCE)
TxD
RxD
0Ω
TP
0Ω
TP
0Ω
TP
16 TXD
17 RXD
RTS
14 RTS
CTS
DTR
15 CTS
13 DTR
DSR
10 DSR
RI
11 RI
TP
DCD
12 DCD
GND
GND
Figure 53: UART interface application circuit with partial V.24 link (5-wire) in the DTE/DCE serial communication (1.8V DTE)
If a 3.0 V Application Processor (DTE) is used, then it is recommended to connect the 1.8 V UART interface of the
module (DCE) by means of appropriate unidirectional voltage translators using the module V_INT output as
1.8 V supply for the voltage translators on the module side, as described in Figure 54.
Application Processor
(3.0V DTE)
VCC
Unidirectional
Voltage Translator
3V0
C1
VCCA
DIR1
DIR3
VCCB
TOBY-R2 series
(1.8V DCE)
1V8
TP
C2
0Ω
TP
0Ω
TP
V_INT
TxD
A1
B1
RxD
A2
B2
RTS
A3
B3
14 RTS
CTS
A4
B4
15 CTS
DIR2
DIR4
U1
DTR
16 TXD
17 RXD
OE
GND
0Ω
TP
DSR
13 DTR
10 DSR
RI
11 RI
TP
DCD
GND
12 DCD
GND
Figure 54: UART interface application circuit with partial V.24 link (5-wire) in DTE/DCE serial communication (3.0 V DTE)
Reference
Description
Part Number - Manufacturer
C1, C2
100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V
GRM155R61A104KA01 - Murata
U1
Unidirectional Voltage Translator
SN74AVC4T77416 - Texas Instruments
Table 41: Component for UART application circuit with partial V.24 link (5-wire) in DTE/DCE serial communication (3.0 V DTE)
16
Voltage translator providing partial power down feature so that the DTE 3.0 V supply can be also ramped up before V_INT 1.8 V supply
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 102 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Providing the TXD and RXD lines only (not using the complete V24 link)
If the functionality of the CTS, RTS, DSR, DCD, RI and DTR lines is not required in the application, or the lines
are not available, then:

Connect the module RTS input line to GND or to the CTS output line of the module: since the module
requires RTS active (low electrical level) if HW flow-control is enabled (AT&K3, which is the default setting)

Connect the module DTR input line to GND using a 0  series resistor, because it is useful to set DTR active
if not specifically handled (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], &D, S0, +CSGT, +CNMI AT commands)

Leave DSR, DCD and RI lines of the module floating, with a test-point on DCD
If RS-232 compatible signal levels are needed, the Maxim MAX13234E voltage level translator can be used. This
chip translates voltage levels from 1.8 V (module side) to the RS-232 standard.
If a 1.8 V Application Processor (DTE) is used, the circuit that should be implemented as described in Figure 55.
Application Processor
(1.8V DTE)
TOBY-R2 series
(1.8V DCE)
TxD
RxD
0Ω
TP
0Ω
TP
0Ω
TP
16 TXD
17 RXD
RTS
14 RTS
CTS
DTR
15 CTS
13 DTR
DSR
10 DSR
RI
11 RI
TP
DCD
12 DCD
GND
GND
Figure 55: UART interface application circuit with partial V.24 link (3-wire) in the DTE/DCE serial communication (1.8V DTE)
If a 3.0 V Application Processor (DTE) is used, then it is recommended to connect the 1.8 V UART interface of the
module (DCE) by means of appropriate unidirectional voltage translators using the module V_INT output as
1.8 V supply for the voltage translators on the module side, as described in Figure 56.
Application Processor
(3.0V DTE)
VCC
Unidirectional
Voltage Translator
3V0
TOBY-R2 series
(1.8V DCE)
1V8
TP
V_INT
16
TXD
17
RXD
14
RTS
15
CTS
13
DTR
DSR
10
DSR
RI
11
RI
12
DCD
C1
VCCA
VCCB
DIR1
TxD
A1
B1
RxD
A2
B2
DIR2
C2
0Ω
TP
0Ω
TP
0Ω
TP
OE
GND
U1
RTS
CTS
DTR
TP
DCD
GND
GND
Figure 56: UART interface application circuit with partial V.24 link (3-wire) in DTE/DCE serial communication (3.0 V DTE)
Reference
Description
Part Number - Manufacturer
C1, C2
U1
100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V
Unidirectional Voltage Translator
GRM155R61A104KA01 - Murata
SN74AVC2T24517 - Texas Instruments
Table 42: Component for UART application circuit with partial V.24 link (3-wire) in DTE/DCE serial communication (3.0 V DTE)
17
Voltage translator providing partial power down feature so that the DTE 3.0 V supply can be also ramped up before V_INT 1.8 V supply
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 103 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Additional considerations
If a 3.0 V Application Processor (DTE) is used, the voltage scaling from any 3.0 V output of the DTE to the
corresponding 1.8 V input of the module (DCE) can be implemented as an alternative low-cost solution, by
means of an appropriate voltage divider. Consider the value of the pull-up integrated at the input of the module
(DCE) for the correct selection of the voltage divider resistance values and mind that any DTE signal connected to
the module must be tri-stated or set low when the module is in power-down mode and during the module
power-on sequence (at least until the activation of the V_INT supply output of the module), to avoid latch-up of
circuits and allow a proper boot of the module (see the remark below).
Moreover, the voltage scaling from any 1.8 V output of the cellular module (DCE) to the corresponding 3.0 V
input of the Application Processor (DTE) can be implemented by means of an appropriate low-cost non-inverting
buffer with open drain output. The non-inverting buffer should be supplied by the V_INT supply output of the
cellular module. Consider the value of the pull-up integrated at each input of the DTE (if any) and the baud rate
required by the application for the appropriate selection of the resistance value for the external pull-up biased by
the application processor supply rail.
If power saving is enabled the application circuit with the TXD and RXD lines only is not recommended.
During command mode the DTE must send to the module a wake-up character or a dummy “AT” before
each command line (see section 1.9.1.4 for the complete description), but during data mode the wake-up
character or the dummy “AT” would affect the data communication.
Do not apply voltage to any UART interface pin before the switch-on of the UART supply source (V_INT),
to avoid latch-up of circuits and allow a proper boot of the module. If the external signals connected to
the cellular module cannot be tri-stated or set low, insert a multi channel digital switch (e.g. TI
SN74CB3Q16244, TS5A3159, or TS5A63157) between the two-circuit connections and set to high
impedance before V_INT switch-on.
ESD sensitivity rating of UART interface pins is 1 kV (Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114).
Higher protection level could be required if the lines are externally accessible and it can be achieved by
mounting an ESD protection (e.g. EPCOS CA05P4S14THSG varistor array) close to accessible points.
If the UART interface pins are not used, they can be left unconnected on the application board, but it is
recommended providing accessible test points directly connected to the TXD, RXD, DTR and DCD pins
for diagnostic purpose, in particular providing a 0  series jumper on each line to detach each UART pin
of the module from the DTE application processor.
2.6.1.2
Guidelines for UART layout design
The UART serial interface requires the same consideration regarding electro-magnetic interference as any other
digital interface. Keep the traces short and avoid coupling with RF line or sensitive analog inputs, since the
signals can cause the radiation of some harmonics of the digital data frequency.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 104 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.6.2
USB interface
2.6.2.1
Guidelines for USB circuit design
The USB_D+ and USB_D- lines carry the USB serial data and signaling. The lines are used in single ended mode
for full speed signaling handshake, as well as in differential mode for high speed signaling and data transfer.
USB pull-up or pull-down resistors and external series resistors on USB_D+ and USB_D- lines as required by the
USB 2.0 specification [6] are part of the module USB pins driver and do not need to be externally provided.
The USB interface of the module is enabled only if a valid voltage is detected by the VUSB_DET input (see the
TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1]). Neither the USB interface, nor the whole module is supplied by the VUSB_DET
input: the VUSB_DET senses the USB supply voltage and absorbs few microamperes.
Routing the USB pins to a connector, they will be externally accessible on the application device. According to
EMC/ESD requirements of the application, an additional ESD protection device with very low capacitance should
be provided close to accessible point on the line connected to this pin, as described in Figure 57 and Table 43.
The USB interface pins ESD sensitivity rating is 1 kV (Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114F).
Higher protection level could be required if the lines are externally accessible and it can be achieved by
mounting a very low capacitance (i.e. less or equal to 1 pF) ESD protection (e.g. Tyco Electronics
PESD0402-140 ESD protection device) on the lines connected to these pins, close to accessible points.
The USB pins of the modules can be directly connected to the USB host application processor without additional
ESD protections if they are not externally accessible or according to EMC/ESD requirements.
USB DEVICE
CONNECTOR
TOBY-R2 series
VBUS
VUSB_DET
D+
28
D-
27
GND
D1
D2
D3
C1
USB HOST
PROCESSOR
TOBY-R2 series
VBUS
VUSB_DET
USB_D+
D+
28
USB_D+
USB_D-
D-
27
USB_D-
GND
GND
C1
GND
Figure 57: USB Interface application circuits
Reference
Description
Part Number - Manufacturer
C1
D1, D2, D3
100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V
Very Low Capacitance ESD Protection
GRM155R61A104KA01 - Murata
PESD0402-140 - Tyco Electronics
Table 43: Component for USB application circuits
If the USB interface pins are not used, they can be left unconnected on the application board, but it is
recommended providing accessible test points directly connected to VUSB_DET, USB_D+, USB_D- pins.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 105 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.6.2.2 Guidelines for USB layout design
The USB_D+ / USB_D- lines require accurate layout design to achieve reliable signaling at the high speed data
rate (up to 480 Mb/s) supported by the USB serial interface.
The characteristic impedance of the USB_D+ / USB_D- lines is specified by the Universal Serial Bus Revision 2.0
specification [6]. The most important parameter is the differential characteristic impedance applicable for the
odd-mode electromagnetic field, which should be as close as possible to 90  differential. Signal integrity may
be degraded if PCB layout is not optimal, especially when the USB signaling lines are very long.
Use the following general routing guidelines to minimize signal quality problems:

Route USB_D+ / USB_D- lines as a differential pair

Route USB_D+ / USB_D- lines as short as possible

Ensure the differential characteristic impedance (Z 0) is as close as possible to 90 

Ensure the common mode characteristic impedance (ZCM) is as close as possible to 30 

Consider design rules for USB_D+ / USB_D- similar to RF transmission lines, being them coupled differential
micro-strip or buried stripline: avoid any stubs, abrupt change of layout, and route on clear PCB area
Figure 58 and Figure 59 provide two examples of coplanar waveguide designs with differential characteristic
impedance close to 90  and common mode characteristic impedance close to 30 . The first transmission line
can be implemented in case of 4-layer PCB stack-up herein described, the second transmission line can be
implemented in case of 2-layer PCB stack-up herein described.
400 µm 350 µm 400 µm 350 µm 400 µm
L1 Copper
35 µm
FR-4 dielectric
270 µm
L2 Copper
35 µm
FR-4 dielectric
760 µm
L3 Copper
35 µm
FR-4 dielectric
270 µm
L4 Copper
35 µm
Figure 58: Example of USB line design, with Z0 close to 90  and ZCM close to 30 , for the described 4-layer board layup
410 µm 740 µm 410 µm 740 µm 410 µm
L1 Copper
35 µm
FR-4 dielectric
1510 µm
L2 Copper
35 µm
Figure 59: Example of USB line design, with Z0 close to 90  and ZCM close to 30 , for the described 2-layer board layup
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 106 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.6.3
DDC (I2C) interface
2.6.3.1
Guidelines for DDC (I C) circuit design
Communication with u-blox GNSS receivers over DDC (I C) is not supported by “02” product versions.
The DDC I C-bus master interface can be used to communicate with u-blox GNSS receivers and other external
I C-bus slaves as an audio codec. Beside the general considerations reported below, see:

the following parts of this section for specific guidelines for the connection to u-blox GNSS receivers

the section 2.7.1 for an application circuit example with an external audio codec I C-bus slave.
To be compliant with the I C bus specifications, the module bus interface pads are open drain output and pull up
resistors must be mounted externally. Resistor values must conform to I C bus specifications [12]: for example,
4.7 k resistors can be commonly used. Pull-ups must be connected to a supply voltage of 1.8 V (typical), since
this is the voltage domain of the DDC pins which are not tolerant to higher voltage values (e.g. 3.0 V).
Connect the DDC (I C) pull-ups to the V_INT 1.8 V supply source, or another 1.8 V supply source enabled
after V_INT (e.g., as the GNSS 1.8 V supply present in Figure 60 application circuit), as any external signal
connected to the DDC (I C) interface must not be set high before the switch-on of the V_INT supply of
DDC (I C) pins, to avoid latch-up of circuits and let a proper boot of the module.
The signal shape is defined by the values of the pull-up resistors and the bus capacitance. Long wires on the bus
will increase the capacitance. If the bus capacitance is increased, use pull-up resistors with nominal resistance
value lower than 4.7 k, to match the I C bus specifications [12] regarding rise and fall times of the signals.
Capacitance and series resistance must be limited on the bus to match the I C specifications (1.0 µs is the
maximum allowed rise time on the SCL and SDA lines): route connections as short as possible.
If the pins are not used as DDC bus interface, they can be left unconnected.
ESD sensitivity rating of the DDC (I C) pins is 1 kV (Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114).
Higher protection level could be required if the lines are externally accessible and it can be achieved by
mounting an ESD protection (e.g. EPCOS CA05P4S14THSG varistor array) close to accessible points.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 107 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Connection with u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receivers
Figure 60 shows an application circuit for connecting the cellular modules to a u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receiver.

SDA / SCL pins of the cellular module are directly connected to the relative I C pins of the u-blox 1.8 V GNSS
receiver, with appropriate pull-up resistors connected to the 1.8 V GNSS supply enabled after the V_INT
supply of the I C pins of the cellular module.

GPIO2 pin is connected to the shutdown input pin (SHDNn) of the LDO regulators providing the 1.8 V
supply rail for the u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receiver implementing the “GNSS enable” function, with appropriate
pull-down resistor mounted on GPIO2 line to avoid an improper switch on of the u-blox GNSS receiver.

GPIO3 and GPIO4 pins are directly connected respectively to TXD1 and EXTINT0 pins of the u-blox 1.8 V
GNSS receiver providing “GNSS Tx data ready” and “GNSS RTC sharing” functions.

The V_BCKP supply output of the cellular module is connected to the V_BCKP backup supply input pin of
the GNSS receiver to provide the supply for the GNSS real time clock and backup RAM when the VCC supply
of the cellular module is within its operating range and the VCC supply of the GNSS receiver is disabled. This
enables the u-blox GNSS receiver to recover from a power breakdown with either a hot start or a warm start
(depending on the actual duration of the GNSS VCC outage) and to maintain the configuration settings
saved in the backup RAM.
u-blox GNSS
1.8 V receiver
TOBY-R2 series
(except ‘02’ product versions)
V_BCKP
GNSS LDO
Regulator
1V8
VCC
IN
OUT
1V8
1V8
SHDNn
C1
V_BCKP
VMAIN
GNSS supply enabled
GND
22 GPIO2
R3
U1
R1
R2
SDA2
55 SDA
SCL2
TxD1
EXTINT0
54 SCL
GNSS Tx data ready
24 GPIO3
GNSS RTC sharing
25 GPIO4
Figure 60: Application circuit for connecting TOBY-R2 series modules to u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receivers
Reference
Description
Part Number - Manufacturer
R1, R2
4.7 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
RC0402JR-074K7L - Yageo Phycomp
R3
47 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
Voltage Regulator for GNSS receiver and capacitor
RC0402JR-0747KL - Yageo Phycomp
U1, C1
See GNSS receiver Hardware Integration Manual
Table 44: Components for connecting TOBY-R2 series modules to u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receivers
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 108 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Figure 61 illustrates an alternative application circuit solution in which the cellular module supplies a u-blox 1.8 V
GNSS receiver. The V_INT 1.8 V regulated supply output of the cellular module can be used as supply source for
a u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receiver (u-blox 6 generation receiver or newer) instead of using an external voltage
regulator, as shown in Figure 60. The V_INT supply is able to support the maximum current consumption of
these positioning receivers.
The internal switching step-down regulator that generates the V_INT supply is set to 1.8 V (typical) when the
cellular module is switched on and it is disabled when the module is switched off.
The supply of the u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receiver can be switched off using an external p-channel MOS controlled by
the GPIO2 pin of the cellular modules by means of a proper inverting transistor as shown in Figure 61,
implementing the “GNSS supply enable” function. If this feature is not required, the V_INT supply output can be
directly connected to the u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receiver, so that it will switch on when V_INT output is enabled.
According to the V_INT supply output voltage ripple characteristic specified in TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1]:

Additional filtering may be needed to properly supply an external LNA, depending on the characteristics of
the used LNA, adding a series ferrite bead and a bypass capacitor (e.g. the Murata BLM15HD182SN1 ferrite
bead and the Murata GRM1555C1H220J 22 pF capacitor) at the input of the external LNA supply line
u-blox GNSS
1.8 V receiver
TOBY-R2 series
(except ‘02’ product versions)
V_BCKP
V_BCKP
V_INT
22
GPIO2
SDA2
55
SDA
SCL2
54
SCL
1V8
T1
VCC
TP
R5
C1
1V8
R4
1V8
T2
R1
GNSS supply enabled
R3
R2
GNSS data ready
TxD1
GNSS RTC sharing
EXTINT0
24 GPIO3
25
GPIO4
Figure 61: Application circuit for connecting TOBY-R2 series modules to u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receivers using V_INT as supply
Reference
Description
Part Number - Manufacturer
R1, R2
4.7 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
RC0402JR-074K7L - Yageo Phycomp
R3
47 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
RC0402JR-0747KL - Yageo Phycomp
R4
10 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
RC0402JR-0710KL - Yageo Phycomp
R5
100 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
P-Channel MOSFET Low On-Resistance
RC0402JR-07100KL - Yageo Phycomp
T1
T2
NPN BJT Transistor
BC847 - Infineon
C1
100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V
GRM155R71C104KA01 - Murata
IRLML6401 - International Rectifier or NTZS3151P - ON Semi
Table 45: Components for connecting TOBY-R2 series modules to u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receivers using V_INT as supply
For additional guidelines regarding the design of applications with u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receivers see the GNSS
Implementation Application Note [13] and the Hardware Integration Manual of the u-blox GNSS receivers.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 109 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Connection with u-blox 3.0 V GNSS receivers
Figure 62 shows an application circuit for connecting the cellular modules to a u-blox 3.0 V GNSS receiver:

As the SDA and SCL pins of the cellular module are not tolerant up to 3.0 V, the connection to the related
I C pins of the u-blox 3.0 V GNSS receiver must be provided using a proper I C-bus Bidirectional Voltage
Translator with proper pull-up resistors (e.g. the TI TCA9406 additionally provides the partial power down
feature so that the GNSS 3.0 V supply can be ramped up before the V_INT 1.8 V cellular supply).

GPIO2 pin is connected to the shutdown input pin (SHDNn) of the LDO regulators providing the 3.0 V
supply rail for the u-blox 3.0 V GNSS receiver implementing the “GNSS enable” function, with appropriate
pull-down resistor mounted on GPIO2 line to avoid an improper switch on of the u-blox GNSS receiver.

As the GPIO3 and GPIO4 pins of the cellular module are not tolerant up to 3.0 V, the connection to the
related pins of the u-blox 3.0 V GNSS receiver must be provided using a proper Unidirectional General
Purpose Voltage Translator (e.g. TI SN74AVC2T245, which additionally provides the partial power down
feature so that the 3.0 V GNSS supply can be also ramped up before the V_INT 1.8 V cellular supply).

The V_BCKP supply output of the cellular module can be directly connected to the V_BCKP backup supply
input pin of the GNSS receiver as in the application circuit for a u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receiver.
u-blox GNSS
3.0 V receiver
TOBY-R2 series
(except ‘02’ product versions)
V_BCKP
3V0
GNSS LDO Regulator
VCC
C1
OUT
IN
GND
SHDNn
GNSS supply enabled
I2C-bus Bidirectional
Voltage Translator
C2
SDA2
VCCB
1V8
VCCA
C3
OE
R2
SCL2
22 GPIO2
R3
U1
R1
V_BCKP
VMAIN
R4
R5
V_INT
SDA_B
SDA_A
55 SDA
SCL_B
SCL_A
54 SCL
GND
U2
Unidirectional
Voltage Translator
3V0
C4
VCCA
DIR1
1V8
VCCB
TxD1
A1
B1
EXTINT0
A2
B2
DIR2 GND
C5
GNSS data ready
GNSS RTC sharing
24 GPIO3
25 GPIO4
OEn
U3
Figure 62: Application circuit for connecting TOBY-R2 series modules to u-blox 3.0 V GNSS receivers
Reference
Description
Part Number - Manufacturer
R1, R2, R4, R5
4.7 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
RC0402JR-074K7L - Yageo Phycomp
R3
RC0402JR-0747KL - Yageo Phycomp
C2, C3, C4, C5
47 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 0402 10% 10V
U1, C1
Voltage Regulator for GNSS receiver and capacitor
See GNSS receiver Hardware Integration Manual
U2
U3
I2C-bus Bidirectional Voltage Translator
Generic Unidirectional Voltage Translator
TCA9406DCUR - Texas Instruments
SN74AVC2T245 - Texas Instruments
GRM155R71C104KA01 - Murata
Table 46: Components for connecting TOBY-R2 series modules to u-blox 3.0 V GNSS receivers
For additional guidelines regarding the design of applications with u-blox 3.0 V GNSS receivers see the GNSS
Implementation Application Note [13] and the Hardware Integration Manual of the u-blox GNSS receivers.
2.6.3.2
Guidelines for DDC (I C) layout design
The DDC (I C) serial interface requires the same consideration regarding electro-magnetic interference as any
other digital interface. Keep the traces short and avoid coupling with RF line or sensitive analog inputs, since the
signals can cause the radiation of some harmonics of the digital data frequency.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 110 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.6.4
SDIO interface
2.6.4.1
Guidelines for SDIO circuit design
The functionality of the SDIO Secure Digital Input Output interface pins is not supported by TOBY-R2
series modules “02” product versions: the pins should not be driven by any external device.
TOBY-R2 series modules include a 4-bit Secure Digital Input Output interface (SDIO_D0, SDIO_D1, SDIO_D2,
SDIO_D3, SDIO_CLK, SDIO_CMD) designed to communicate with an external u-blox short range Wi-Fi module.
Combining a u-blox cellular module with a u-blox short range communication module gives designers full access
to the Wi-Fi module directly via the cellular module, so that a second interface connected to the Wi-Fi module is
not necessary. AT commands via the AT interfaces of the cellular module (UART, USB) allows full control of the
Wi-Fi module from any host processor, because Wi-Fi control messages are relayed to the Wi-Fi module via the
dedicated SDIO interface.
Further guidelines for SDIO interface circuit design will be described in detail in a successive release of the
System Integration Manual.
Do not apply voltage to any SDIO interface pin before the switch-on of SDIO interface supply source
(V_INT), to avoid latch-up of circuits and allow a proper boot of the module.
ESD sensitivity rating of SDIO interface pins is 1 kV (HMB according to JESD22-A114). Higher protection
level could be required if the lines are externally accessible and it can be achieved by mounting a very low
capacitance ESD protection (e.g. Tyco Electronics PESD0402-140 ESD), close to accessible points.
If the SDIO interface pins are not used, they can be left unconnected on the application board.
2.6.4.2
Guidelines for SDIO layout design
The SDIO serial interface requires the same consideration regarding electro-magnetic interference as any other
high speed digital interface.
Keep the traces short, avoid stubs and avoid coupling with RF lines / parts or sensitive analog inputs, since the
signals can cause the radiation of some harmonics of the digital data frequency.
Consider the usage of low value series damping resistors to avoid reflections and other losses in signal integrity,
which may create ringing and loss of a square wave shape.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 111 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.7
Audio interface
2.7.1
Digital audio interface
2.7.1.1 Guidelines for digital audio circuit design
I S digital audio interface can be connected to an external digital audio device for voice applications.
Any external digital audio device compliant with the configuration of the digital audio interface of the TOBY-R2
series cellular module can be used, given that the external digital audio device must provide:

The opposite role: slave or master role, as TOBY-R2 series modules may act as master or slave

The same mode and frame format: PCM / short synch mode or Normal I S / long synch mode with
data in 2’s complement notation
MSB transmitted first
data word length = 16-bit (16 clock cycles)
frame length = synch signal period:
 17-bit or 18-bit in PCM / short alignment mode (16 + 1 or 16 + 2 clock cycles, with the Word
Alignment / Synchronization signal set high for 1 clock cycle or 2 clock cycles)



The same sample rate, i.e. synch signal frequency, configurable by AT+UI2S  parameter
8 kHz
11.025 kHz
12 kHz
16 kHz
22.05 kHz
24 kHz
32 kHz
44.1 kHz
48 kHz
The same serial clock frequency:

32-bit in Normal I S mode / long alignment mode (16 x 2 clock cycles)
17 x  or 18 x  in PCM / short alignment mode, or
16 x 2 x  in Normal I S mode / long alignment mode
Compatible voltage levels (1.80 V typ.), otherwise it is recommended to connect the 1.8 V digital audio
interface of the module to the external 3.0 V (or similar) digital audio device by means of appropriate
unidirectional voltage translators (e.g. TI SN74AVC4T774 or SN74AVC2T245, providing partial power down
feature so that the digital audio device 3.0 V supply can be also ramped up before V_INT 1.8 V supply),
using the module V_INT output as 1.8 V supply for the voltage translators on the module side
For the appropriate selection of a compliant external digital audio device, see section 1.10.1 and see the +UI2S
AT command description in the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2] for further details regarding the capabilities
and the possible settings of I S digital audio interface of TOBY-R2 series modules.
An appropriate specific application circuit has to be implemented and configured according to the particular
external digital audio device or audio codec used and according to the application requirements.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 112 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Examples of manufacturers offering compatible audio codec parts are the following:

Maxim Integrated (as the MAX9860, MAX9867, MAX9880A audio codecs)

Texas Instruments / National Semiconductor

Cirrus Logic / Wolfson Microelectronics

Nuvoton Technology

Asahi Kasei Microdevices

Realtek Semiconductor
Figure 63 and Table 47 describe an application circuit for the I S digital audio interface providing basic voice
capability using an external audio voice codec, in particular the Maxim MAX9860 audio codec.

DAC and ADC integrated in the external audio codec respectively converts an incoming digital data stream
to analog audio output through a mono amplifier and converts the microphone input signal to the digital bit
stream over the digital audio interface,

A digital side-tone mixer integrated in the external audio codec provides loopback of the microphones/ADC
signal to the DAC/headphone output.

The module’s I S interface (I S master) is connected to the related pins of the external audio codec (I S slave).

The GPIO6 of the TOBY-R2 series module (that provides a suitable digital output clock) is connected to the
clock input of the external audio codec to provide clock reference.

The external audio codec is controlled by the TOBY-R2 series module using the DDC (I C) interface, which
can concurrently communicate with other I C devices and control an external audio codec.

The V_INT output supplies the external audio codec, defining proper digital interfaces voltage level.

Additional components are provided for EMC and ESD immunity conformity: a 10 nF bypass capacitor and a
series chip ferrite bead noise/EMI suppression filter provided on each microphone line input and speaker line
output of the external codec as described in Figure 63 and Table 47. The necessity of these or other
additional parts for EMC improvement may depend on the specific application board design.
Specific AT commands are available to configure the Maxim MAX9860 audio codec: for more details see the
u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +UEXTDCONF AT command.
As various external audio codecs other than the one described in Figure 63 / Table 47 can be used to provide
voice capability, the appropriate specific application circuit has to be implemented and configured according to
the particular external digital audio device or audio codec used and according to the application requirements.
TOBY-R2 series
1V8
V_INT
R1
R2
R3
Audio
Codec
C1
IRQn
SDA 55
SCL 54
C2
C3
VDD
MICBIAS
C4
SDA
SCL
I2S_TXD 51
SDIN
I2S_RXD 53
SDOUT
I2S_CLK 52
BCLK
I2S_WA 50
LRCLK
GPIO6 61
MCLK
MICLP
MICLN
EMI1
C5
OUTP
EMI2
C6
J1
R5
MICGND
OUTN
Microphone
Connector MIC
R4
C12 C11
C8
C7
D1
EMI3
Speaker SPK
Connector
EMI4
J2
GND
GND
C14 C13
C10 C9
D2
U1
Figure 63: I2S interface application circuit with an external audio codec to provide voice capability
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 113 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Reference
Description
Part Number – Manufacturer
C1
C2, C4, C5, C6
100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 0402 10% 10V
1 µF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 0402 10% 6.3 V
GRM155R71C104KA01 – Murata
GRM155R60J105KE19 – Murata
C3
C7, C8, C9, C10
10 µF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 0603 20% 6.3 V
27 pF Capacitor Ceramic COG 0402 5% 25 V
GRM188R60J106ME47 – Murata
GRM1555C1H270JZ01 – Murata
C11, C12, C13, C14
D1, D2
10 nF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 0402 10% 50V
Low Capacitance ESD Protection
GRM155R71C103KA88 – Murata
USB0002RP or USB0002DP – AVX
EMI1, EMI2, EMI3,
EMI4
J1
Chip Ferrite Bead Noise/EMI Suppression Filter
1800 Ohm at 100 MHz, 2700 Ohm at 1 GHz
Microphone Connector
BLM15HD182SN1 – Murata
J2
MIC
Speaker Connector
2.2 k Electret Microphone
Various manufacturers
Various manufacturers
R1, R2
4.7 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
RC0402JR-074K7L - Yageo Phycomp
R3
10 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
RC0402JR-0710KL - Yageo Phycomp
R4, R5
2.2 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
RC0402JR-072K2L – Yageo Phycomp
SPK
32  Speaker
16-Bit Mono Audio Voice Codec
Various manufacturers
U1
Various manufacturers
MAX9860ETG+ - Maxim
Table 47: Example of components for audio voice codec application circuit
Do not apply voltage to any I S pin before the switch-on of I S supply source (V_INT), to avoid latch-up of
circuits and allow a proper boot of the module. If the external signals connected to the cellular module
cannot be tri-stated or set low, insert a multi channel digital switch (e.g. TI SN74CB3Q16244, TS5A3159,
or TS5A63157) between the two-circuit connections and set to high impedance before V_INT switch-on.
ESD sensitivity rating of I S interface pins is 1 kV (Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114). Higher
protection level could be required if the lines are externally accessible and it can be achieved by mounting
a general purpose ESD protection (e.g. EPCOS CA05P4S14THSG varistor array) close to accessible points.
If the I S digital audio pins are not used, they can be left unconnected on the application board.
2.7.1.2
Guidelines for digital audio layout design
I S interface and clock output lines require the same consideration regarding electro-magnetic interference as
any other high speed digital interface. Keep the traces short and avoid coupling with RF lines / parts or sensitive
analog inputs, since the signals can cause the radiation of some harmonics of the digital data frequency.
2.7.1.3 Guidelines for analog audio layout design
Accurate design of the analog audio circuit is very important to obtain clear and high quality audio. The GSM
signal burst has a repetition rate of 217 Hz that lies in the audible range. A careful layout is required to reduce
the risk of noise from audio lines due to both VCC burst noise coupling and RF detection.
General guidelines for the uplink path (microphone), which is commonly the most sensitive, are the following:

Avoid coupling of any noisy signal to microphone lines: it is strongly recommended to route microphone
lines away from module VCC supply line, any switching regulator line, RF antenna lines, digital lines and any
other possible noise source.

Avoid coupling between microphone and speaker / receiver lines.

Optimize the mechanical design of the application device, the position, orientation and mechanical fixing
(for example, using rubber gaskets) of microphone and speaker parts in order to avoid echo interference
between uplink path and downlink path.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 114 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual

Keep ground separation from microphone lines to other noisy signals. Use an intermediate ground layer or
vias wall for coplanar signals.

In case of external audio device providing differential microphone input, route microphone signal lines as a
differential pair embedded in ground to reduce differential noise pick-up. The balanced configuration will
help reject the common mode noise.

Cross other signals lines on adjacent layers with 90° crossing.

Place bypass capacitor for RF very close to active microphone. The preferred microphone should be designed
for GSM applications which typically have internal built-in bypass capacitor for RF very close to active device.
If the integrated FET detects the RF burst, the resulting DC level will be in the pass-band of the audio
circuitry and cannot be filtered by any other device.
General guidelines for the downlink path (speaker / receiver) are the following:

The physical width of the audio output lines on the application board must be wide enough to minimize
series resistance since the lines are connected to low impedance speaker transducer.

Avoid coupling of any noisy signal to speaker lines: it is recommended to route speaker lines away from
module VCC supply line, any switching regulator line, RF antenna lines, digital lines and any other possible
noise source.

Avoid coupling between speaker / receiver and microphone lines.

Optimize the mechanical design of the application device, the position, orientation and mechanical fixing
(for example, using rubber gaskets) of speaker and microphone parts in order to avoid echo interference
between downlink path and uplink path.

In case of external audio device providing differential speaker / receiver output, route speaker signal lines as
a differential pair embedded in ground up to reduce differential noise pick-up. The balanced configuration
will help reject the common mode noise.

Cross other signals lines on adjacent layers with 90° crossing.

Place bypass capacitor for RF close to the speaker.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 115 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.8
General Purpose Input/Output
2.8.1.1
Guidelines for GPIO circuit design
A typical usage of TOBY-R2 series modules’ GPIOs can be the following:

Network indication provided over GPIO1 or GPIO4 pin (see Figure 64 / Table 48 below)

SIM card detection provided over GPIO5 (see Figure 47 / Table 37 in section 2.5)

Clock output provided over GPIO6 (see Figure 63 / Table 47 in section 2.7.1)
3V8
TOBY-R2 series
R3
GPIO1 21
Network Indicator
DL1
R1
T1
R2
Figure 64: Application circuit for network indication provided over GPIO1
Reference
Description
Part Number - Manufacturer
R1
10 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
Various manufacturers
R2
47 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
Various manufacturers
R3
Various manufacturers
DL1
820  Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W
LED Red SMT 0603
T1
NPN BJT Transistor
BC847 - Infineon
LTST-C190KRKT - Lite-on Technology Corporation
Table 48: Components for network indication application circuit
Use transistors with at least an integrated resistor in the base pin or otherwise put a 10 k resistor on the
board in series to the GPIO of TOBY-R2 series modules.
Do not apply voltage to any GPIO of the module before the switch-on of the GPIOs supply (V_INT), to
avoid latch-up of circuits and allow a proper module boot. If the external signals connected to the module
cannot be tri-stated or set low, insert a multi channel digital switch (e.g. TI SN74CB3Q16244, TS5A3159,
TS5A63157) between the two-circuit connections and set to high impedance before V_INT switch-on.
ESD sensitivity rating of the GPIO pins is 1 kV (Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114).
Higher protection level could be required if the lines are externally accessible and it can be achieved by
mounting an ESD protection (e.g. EPCOS CA05P4S14THSG varistor array) close to accessible points.
If the GPIO pins are not used, they can be left unconnected on the application board.
2.8.1.2
Guidelines for general purpose input/output layout design
The general purpose inputs / outputs pins are generally not critical for layout.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 116 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.9
Reserved pins (RSVD)
TOBY-R2 series modules have pins reserved for future use, marked as RSVD. All the RSVD pins are to be left
unconnected on the application board except the following RSVD pins as described in Figure 65:

the RSVD pin number 6 that must be externally connected to ground

the RSVD pin number 18 that is recommended to be connected to a Test-Point for diagnostic access

the RSVD pin number 19 that is recommended to be connected to a Test-Point for diagnostic access
TOBY-R2 series
RSVD
RSVD 18
Test-Point
RSVD 19
Test-Point
RSVD
Figure 65: Application circuit for the reserved pins (RSVD)
2.10 Module placement
An optimized placement allows a minimum RF line’s length and closer path from DC source for VCC.
Make sure that the module, analog parts and RF circuits are clearly separated from any possible source of
radiated energy. In particular, digital circuits can radiate digital frequency harmonics, which can produce ElectroMagnetic Interference that affects the module, analog parts and RF circuits’ performance. Implement proper
countermeasures to avoid any possible Electro-Magnetic Compatibility issue.
Make sure that the module, RF and analog parts / circuits, and high speed digital circuits are clearly separated
from any sensitive part / circuit which may be affected by Electro-Magnetic Interference, or employ
countermeasures to avoid any possible Electro-Magnetic Compatibility issue.
Provide enough clearance between the module and any external part.
The heat dissipation during continuous transmission at maximum power can significantly raise the
temperature of the application base-board below the TOBY-R2 series modules: avoid placing temperature
sensitive devices close to the module.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 117 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.11 Module footprint and paste mask
Figure 66 and Table 49 describe the suggested footprint (i.e. copper mask) layout for TOBY-R2 series modules.
The proposed land pattern layout slightly reflects the modules’ pads layout, with most of the lateral pads
designed wider on the application board (1.8 x 0.8 mm) than on the module (1.5 x 0.8 mm).
M1
M1
M2
M1
M1
M3
Module placement outline
P3
P2
P1
F1 F2
I2
I1
I1
I1
I2
I1
J1
F2
Figure 66: TOBY-R2 series module suggest footprint (application board top view)
Parameter
Value
Parameter
Value
Parameter
Value
F1
F2
35.6 mm
24.8 mm
2.40 mm
2.25 mm
1.45 mm
1.30 mm
1.10 mm
I1
I2
M1
0.80 mm
1.50 mm
1.80 mm
0.30 mm
3.15 mm
7.15 mm
1.80 mm
M2
M3
P1
P2
P3
5.20 mm
4.50 mm
2.10 mm
1.10 mm
1.10 mm
1.25 mm
2.85 mm
Table 49: TOBY-R2 series module suggest footprint dimensions
The Non Solder Mask Defined (NSMD) pad type is recommended over the Solder Mask Defined (SMD) pad type,
implementing the solder mask opening 50 µm larger per side than the corresponding copper pad.
The suggested paste mask layout for TOBY-R2 series modules slightly reflects the copper mask layout described
in Figure 66 and Table 49, as different stencil apertures layout for any specific pad is recommended:

Blue marked pads: Paste layout reduced circumferentially about 0.025 mm to Copper layout

Green marked pads: Paste layout enlarged circumferentially about 0.025 mm to Copper layout

Purple marked pads: Paste layout one to one to Copper layout
The recommended solder paste thickness is 150 µm, according to application production process requirements.
These are recommendations only and not specifications. The exact mask geometries, distances and stencil
thicknesses must be adapted to the specific production processes (e.g. soldering etc.) of the customer.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 118 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.12 Thermal guidelines
Modules’ operating temperature range is specified in TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1].
The most critical condition concerning module thermal performance is the uplink transmission at maximum
power (data upload in connected-mode), when the baseband processor runs at full speed, radio circuits are all
active and the RF power amplifier is driven to higher output RF power. This scenario is not often encountered in
real networks (for example, see the Terminal Tx Power distribution for WCDMA, taken from operation on a live
network, described in the GSMA TS.09 Battery Life Measurement and Current Consumption Technique [14]);
however the application should be correctly designed to cope with it.
During transmission at maximum RF power the TOBY-R2 series modules generate thermal power that may
exceed 2 W: this is an indicative value since the exact generated power strictly depends on operating condition
such as the actual antenna return loss, the number of allocated TX resource blocks, the transmitting frequency
band, etc. The generated thermal power must be adequately dissipated through the thermal and mechanical
design of the application.
The spreading of the Module-to-Ambient thermal resistance (Rth,M-A) depends on the module operating
condition. The overall temperature distribution is influenced by the configuration of the active components
during the specific mode of operation and their different thermal resistance toward the case interface.
The Module-to-Ambient thermal resistance value and the relative increase of module temperature will
differ according to the specific mechanical deployments of the module, e.g. application PCB with different
dimensions and characteristics, mechanical shells enclosure, or forced air flow.
The increase of the thermal dissipation, i.e. the reduction of the Module-to-Ambient thermal resistance, will
decrease the temperature of the modules’ internal circuitry for a given operating ambient temperature. This
improves the device long-term reliability in particular for applications operating at high ambient temperature.
Recommended hardware techniques to be used to improve heat dissipation in the application:

Connect each GND pin with solid ground layer of the application board and connect each ground area of
the multilayer application board with complete thermal via stacked down to main ground layer.

Provide a ground plane as wide as possible on the application board.

Optimize antenna return loss, to optimize overall electrical performance of the module including a decrease
of module thermal power.

Optimize the thermal design of any high-power components included in the application, such as linear
regulators and amplifiers, to optimize overall temperature distribution in the application device.

Select the material, the thickness and the surface of the box (i.e. the mechanical enclosure) of the
application device that integrates the module so that it provides good thermal dissipation.
Further hardware techniques that may be considered to improve the heat dissipation in the application:

Force ventilation air-flow within mechanical enclosure.

Provide a heat sink component attached to the module top side, with electrically insulated / high thermal
conductivity adhesive, or on the backside of the application board, below the cellular module, as a large part
of the heat is transported through the GND pads of the TOBY-R2 series LGA modules and dissipated over
the backside of the application board.
For example, the Module-to-Ambient thermal resistance (Rth,M-A) is strongly reduced with forced air ventilation
and a heat-sink installed on the back of the application board, decreasing the module temperature variation.
Beside the reduction of the Module-to-Ambient thermal resistance implemented by proper application hardware
design, the increase of module temperature can be moderated by proper application software implementation:

Enable power saving configuration using the AT+UPSV command (see section 1.13.16).

Enable module connected-mode for a given time period and then disable it for a time period enough long to
properly mitigate temperature increase.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 119 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.13 ESD guidelines
The sections 2.13.1 and 2.13.2 are related to EMC / ESD immunity. The modules are ESD sensitive devices, and
the ESD sensitivity for each pin (as Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114F) is specified in TOBY-R2
series Data Sheet [1]. Special precautions are required when handling: see section 3.2 for handling guidelines.
2.13.1 ESD immunity test overview
The immunity of devices integrating TOBY-R2 series modules to Electro-Static Discharge (ESD) is part of the
Electro-Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) conformity which is required for products bearing the CE marking,
compliant with the R&TTE Directive (99/5/EC), the EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) and the Low Voltage Directive
(73/23/EEC) issued by the Commission of the European Community.
Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the following European Norms for device ESD immunity:
ESD testing standard CENELEC EN 61000-4-2 [15] and the radio equipment standards ETSI EN 301 489-1 [16],
ETSI EN 301 489-7 [17], ETSI EN 301 489-24 [18], which requirements are summarized in Table 50.
The ESD immunity test is performed at the enclosure port, defined by ETSI EN 301 489-1 [16] as the physical
boundary through which the electromagnetic field radiates. If the device implements an integral antenna, the
enclosure port is seen as all insulating and conductive surfaces housing the device. If the device implements a
removable antenna, the antenna port can be separated from the enclosure port. The antenna port includes the
antenna element and its interconnecting cable surfaces.
The applicability of ESD immunity test to the whole device depends on the device classification as defined by ETSI
EN 301 489-1 [16]. Applicability of ESD immunity test to the relative device ports or the relative interconnecting
cables to auxiliary equipment, depends on device accessible interfaces and manufacturer requirements, as
defined by ETSI EN 301 489-1 [16].
Contact discharges are performed at conductive surfaces, while air discharges are performed at insulating
surfaces. Indirect contact discharges are performed on the measurement setup horizontal and vertical coupling
planes as defined in CENELEC EN 61000-4-2 [15].
For the definition of integral antenna, removable antenna, antenna port and device classification see ETSI
EN 301 489-1 [16]. For the contact / air discharges definitions see CENELEC EN 61000-4-2 [15].
Application
Category
Immunity Level
All exposed surfaces of the radio equipment and ancillary equipment in a
representative configuration
Contact Discharge
4 kV
Air Discharge
8 kV
Table 50: EMC / ESD immunity requirements as defined by CENELEC EN 61000-4-2 and ETSI EN 301 489-1, 301 489-7, 301 489-24
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 120 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.14 Schematic for TOBY-R2 series module integration
2.14.1 Schematic for TOBY-R2 series module “02” product version
Figure 67 is an example of a schematic diagram where a TOBY-R2 series cellular module “02” product version is
integrated into an application board, using all the available interfaces and functions of the module.
TOBY-R2 series
(’02’ product version)
330µF
100nF
10nF
68pF
70
VCC
71
VCC
72
VCC
15pF
GND
ANT1
81
82nH
ANT2
87
ANT_DET
75
Secondary
Cellular
Antenna
Connector
33pF
82nH
Mount for modules
supporting 2G
RTC
back-up
Primary
Cellular
Antenna
Connector
33pF
3V8
V_BCKP
10k
27pF
Application
Processor
ESD
V_INT
GND
100µF
SIM Card Holder
1k
TP
V_INT
GPIO5
60
SW2
VSIM
59
CCVCC (C1)
SIM_IO
57
CCIO (C7)
SIM_CLK
56
CCCLK (C3)
SIM_RST
58
CCRST (C2)
SW1
CCVPP (C6)
TP
Open
drain
output
TP
Open
drain
output
20
23
PWR_ON
RESET_N
470k
47pF 47pF 47pF 47pF 100nF
V_INT
VBUS
DD+
Audio Codec
MAX9860
10k
USB 2.0 host
0Ω
TP
0Ω
TP
0Ω
TP
VDD
27
USB_D-
28
USB_D+
MICBIAS
4.7k
VUSB_DET
GND
SDA
55
SCL
54
SCL
I2S_TXD
51
SDIN
SDA
TXD
RXD
0Ω
TP
RTS
TP
CTS
DTR
0Ω
TP
TP
DSR
TP
RI
DCD
TP
0Ω
TP
16
TXD
17
RXD
14
RTS
15
CTS
13
DTR
10
DSR
11
RI
12
DCD
100nF
1µF
1µF
10µF
2.2k
4.7k
I2S_RXD
53
SDOUT
I2S_CLK
52
BCLK
MICLP
MICLN
MICGND
1.8 V DTE
TP
V_INT
IRQn
GND
0Ω
GND (C5)
ESD ESD ESD ESD ESD ESD
I2S_WA
50
LRCLK
GPIO6
61
MCLK
OUTP
OUTN
MIC
EMI
1µF
EMI
1µF
2.2k
10nF 10nF
27pF 27pF
ESD ESD
27pF 27pF
ESD ESD
SPK
EMI
EMI
10nF 10nF
GND
GND
3V8
Network
Indicator
TP
TP
26
HOST_SELECT0
SDIO_D0
66
62
HOST_SELECT1
SDIO_D1
68
SDIO_D2
63
22
GPIO2
SDIO_D3
67
24
GPIO3
SDIO_CLK
64
25
GPIO4
SDIO_CMD
65
18
RSVD
GPIO1
21
19
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
GND
Figure 67: Example of schematic diagram to integrate a TOBY-R2 module “02” product version using all available interfaces
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 121 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.15 Design-in checklist
This section provides a design-in checklist.
2.15.1 Schematic checklist
The following are the most important points for a simple schematic check:


DC supply must provide a nominal voltage at VCC pin within the operating range limits.

VCC voltage supply should be clean, with very low ripple/noise: provide the suggested bypass capacitors,
in particular if the application device integrates an internal antenna.



Do not apply loads which might exceed the limit for maximum available current from V_INT supply.




Capacitance and series resistance must be limited on each SIM signal to match the SIM specifications.


Capacitance and series resistance must be limited on each high speed line of the USB interface.


Consider providing appropriate low value series damping resistors on SDIO lines to avoid reflections.




Check the digital audio interface specifications to connect a proper external audio device.



Provide accessible test points directly connected to the RSVD pins number 18 and 19.

All unused pins can be left unconnected except the RSVD pin number 6 of TOBY-R2 series modules,
which must be connected to GND.
DC supply must be capable of supporting both the highest peak and the highest averaged current
consumption values in connected-mode, as specified in the TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1].
Check that voltage level of any connected pin does not exceed the relative operating range.
Provide accessible test points directly connected to the following pins of the TOBY-R2 series modules:
V_INT, PWR_ON and RESET_N for diagnostic purpose.
Insert the suggested pF capacitors on each SIM signal and low capacitance ESD protections if accessible.
Check UART signals direction, as the modules’ signal names follow the ITU-T V.24 Recommendation [7].
Provide accessible test points directly connected to all the UART pins of the TOBY-R2 series modules
(TXD, RXD, DTR, DCD) for diagnostic purpose, in particular providing a 0  series jumper on each line
to detach each UART pin of the module from the DTE application processor.
If the USB is not used, provide accessible test points directly connected to the USB interface (VUSB_DET,
USB_D+ and USB_D- pins).
Add a proper pull-up resistor (e.g. 4.7 k) to V_INT or another proper 1.8 V supply on each DDC (I C)
interface line, if the interface is used.
Capacitance and series resistance must be limited on master clock output line and each I S interface line
Consider passive filtering parts on each used analog audio line.
Use transistors with at least an integrated resistor in the base pin or otherwise put a 10 k resistor on
the board in series to the GPIO when those are used to drive LEDs.
Provide proper precautions for EMC / ESD immunity as required on the application board.
Do not apply voltage to any generic digital interface pin of TOBY-R2 series modules before the switchon of the generic digital interface supply source (V_INT).
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 122 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
2.15.2 Layout checklist
The following are the most important points for a simple layout check:

Check 50  nominal characteristic impedance of the RF transmission line connected to the ANT1 and
the ANT2 ports (antenna RF interfaces).

Ensure no coupling occurs between the RF interface and noisy or sensitive signals (primarily analog audio
input/output signals, SIM signals, high-speed digital lines such as SDIO, USB and other data lines).





Optimize placement for minimum length of RF line.


Ensure an optimal grounding connecting each GND pin with application board solid ground layer.


Keep routing short and minimize parasitic capacitance on the SIM lines to preserve signal integrity.

Keep the SDIO traces short, avoid stubs, avoid coupling with any RF line / part and consider low value
series damping resistors to avoid reflections and other losses in signal integrity.


Ensure appropriate RF precautions for the Wi-Fi and Cellular technologies coexistence


Route analog audio signals away from noisy sources (primarily RF interface, VCC, switching supplies).
Check the footprint and paste mask designed for TOBY-R2 series module as illustrated in section 2.11.
VCC line should be wide and as short as possible.
Route VCC supply line away from RF lines / parts and other sensitive analog lines / parts.
The VCC bypass capacitors in the picoFarad range should be placed as close as possible to the VCC pins,
in particular if the application device integrates an internal antenna.
Use as many vias as possible to connect the ground planes on multilayer application board, providing a
dense line of vias at the edges of each ground area, in particular along RF and high speed lines.
USB_D+ / USB_D- traces should meet the characteristic impedance requirement (90  differential and
30  common mode) and should not be routed close to any RF line / part.
Ensure appropriate RF precautions for the GNSS and Cellular technologies coexistence as described in
the GNSS Implementation Application Note [13].
The audio outputs lines on the application board must be wide enough to minimize series resistance.
2.15.3 Antenna checklist

Antenna termination should provide 50  characteristic impedance with V.S.W.R at least less than 3:1
(recommended 2:1) on operating bands in deployment geographical area.

Follow the recommendations of the antenna producer for correct antenna installation and deployment
(PCB layout and matching circuitry).

Ensure compliance with any regulatory agency RF radiation requirement, as reported in sections 4.2.2
and/or 4.3.1 for products marked with the FCC and/or IC.



Ensure high and similar efficiency for both the primary (ANT1) and the secondary (ANT2) antenna.

Ensure high isolation between the cellular antennas and any other antenna or transmitter.
Ensure high isolation between the primary (ANT1) and the secondary (ANT2) antenna.
Ensure low Envelope Correlation Coefficient between the primary (ANT1) and the secondary (ANT2)
antenna: the 3D antenna radiation patterns should have radiation lobes in different directions.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Design-in
Page 123 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
3 Handling and soldering
No natural rubbers, no hygroscopic materials or materials containing asbestos are employed.
3.1
Packaging, shipping, storage and moisture preconditioning
For information pertaining to TOBY-R2 series reels / tapes, Moisture Sensitivity levels (MSD), shipment and
storage information, as well as drying for preconditioning, see the TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1] and the u-blox
Package Information Guide [25].
3.2 Handling
The TOBY-R2 series modules are Electro-Static Discharge (ESD) sensitive devices.
Ensure ESD precautions are implemented during handling of the module.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) is the sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at
different electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field. The term is usually
used in the electronics and other industries to describe momentary unwanted currents that may cause damage
to electronic equipment.
The ESD sensitivity for each pin of TOBY-R2 series modules (as Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114F)
is specified in the TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1].
ESD prevention is based on establishing an Electrostatic Protective Area (EPA). The EPA can be a small working
station or a large manufacturing area. The main principle of an EPA is that there are no highly charging materials
near ESD sensitive electronics, all conductive materials are grounded, workers are grounded, and charge build-up
on ESD sensitive electronics is prevented. International standards are used to define typical EPA and can be
obtained for example from International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) or American National Standards
Institute (ANSI).
In addition to standard ESD safety practices, the following measures should be taken into account whenever
handling the TOBY-R2 series modules:

Unless there is a galvanic coupling between the local GND (i.e. the work table) and the PCB GND, then the
first point of contact when handling the PCB must always be between the local GND and PCB GND.

Before mounting an antenna patch, connect ground of the device.

When handling the module, do not come into contact with any charged capacitors and be careful when
contacting materials that can develop charges (e.g. patch antenna, coax cable, soldering iron,…).

To prevent electrostatic discharge through the RF pin, do not touch any exposed antenna area. If there is
any risk that such exposed antenna area is touched in non ESD protected work area, implement proper ESD
protection measures in the design.

When soldering the module and patch antennas to the RF pin, make sure to use an ESD safe soldering iron.
For more robust designs, employ additional ESD protection measures on the application device integrating the
TOBY-R2 series modules, as described in section 2.13.3.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Handling and soldering
Page 124 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
3.3
3.3.1
Soldering
Soldering paste
"No Clean" soldering paste is strongly recommended for TOBY-R2 series modules, as it does not require
cleaning after the soldering process has taken place. The paste listed in the example below meets these criteria.
Soldering Paste:
OM338 SAC405 / Nr.143714 (Cookson Electronics)
Alloy specification:
95.5% Sn / 3.9% Ag / 0.6% Cu (95.5% Tin / 3.9% Silver / 0.6% Copper)
95.5% Sn / 4.0% Ag / 0.5% Cu (95.5% Tin / 4.0% Silver / 0.5% Copper)
Melting Temperature:
217 °C
Stencil Thickness:
150 µm for base boards
The final choice of the soldering paste depends on the approved manufacturing procedures.
The paste-mask geometry for applying soldering paste should meet the recommendations in section 2.11.
The quality of the solder joints on the connectors (“half vias”) should meet the appropriate IPC
specification.
3.3.2
Reflow soldering
A convection type-soldering oven is strongly recommended for TOBY-R2 series modules over the infrared
type radiation oven. Convection heated ovens allow precise control of the temperature and all parts will be
heated up evenly, regardless of material properties, thickness of components and surface color.
Consider the ”IPC-7530 Guidelines for temperature profiling for mass soldering (reflow and wave) processes”,
published 2001.
Reflow profiles are to be selected according to the following recommendations.
Failure to observe these recommendations can result in severe damage to the device!
Preheat phase
Initial heating of component leads and balls. Residual humidity will be dried out. Note that this preheat phase
will not replace prior baking procedures.

Temperature rise rate: max 3 °C/s
If the temperature rise is too rapid in the preheat phase it may cause
excessive slumping.

Time: 60 – 120 s
If the preheat is insufficient, rather large solder balls tend to be
generated. Conversely, if performed excessively, fine balls and large
balls will be generated in clusters.

End Temperature: 150 - 200 °C
If the temperature is too low, non-melting tends to be caused in
areas containing large heat capacity.
Heating/ reflow phase
The temperature rises above the liquidus temperature of 217 °C. Avoid a sudden rise in temperature as the
slump of the paste could become worse.

Limit time above 217 °C liquidus temperature: 40 - 60 s

Peak reflow temperature: 245 °C
Cooling phase
A controlled cooling avoids negative metallurgical effects (solder becomes more brittle) of the solder and
possible mechanical tensions in the products. Controlled cooling helps to achieve bright solder fillets with a good
shape and low contact angle.

Temperature fall rate: max 4 °C/s
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Handling and soldering
Page 125 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
To avoid falling off, modules should be placed on the topside of the motherboard during soldering.
The soldering temperature profile chosen at the factory depends on additional external factors like choice of
soldering paste, size, thickness and properties of the base board, etc.
Exceeding the maximum soldering temperature and the maximum liquidus time limit in the
recommended soldering profile may permanently damage the module.
Preheat
[°C]
250
Heating
Peak Temp. 245°C
Cooling
[°C]
250
Liquidus Temperature
217
200
217
200
40 - 60 s
End Temp.
150 - 200°C
max 4°C/s
150
150
max 3°C/s
60 - 120 s
Typical Leadfree
Soldering Profile
100
50
100
50
Elapsed time [s]
Figure 68: Recommended soldering profile
The modules must not be soldered with a damp heat process.
3.3.3
Optical inspection
After soldering the TOBY-R2 series modules, inspect the modules optically to verify that the module is properly
aligned and centered.
3.3.4
Cleaning
Cleaning the modules is not recommended. Residues underneath the modules cannot be easily removed with a
washing process.

Cleaning with water will lead to capillary effects where water is absorbed in the gap between the baseboard
and the module. The combination of residues of soldering flux and encapsulated water leads to short circuits
or resistor-like interconnections between neighboring pads. Water will also damage the sticker and the inkjet printed text.

Cleaning with alcohol or other organic solvents can result in soldering flux residues flooding into the two
housings, areas that are not accessible for post-wash inspections. The solvent will also damage the sticker
and the ink-jet printed text.

Ultrasonic cleaning will permanently damage the module, in particular the quartz oscillators.
For best results use a "no clean" soldering paste and eliminate the cleaning step after the soldering.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Handling and soldering
Page 126 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
3.3.5
Repeated reflow soldering
Only a single reflow soldering process is encouraged for boards with a module populated on it.
3.3.6
Wave soldering
Boards with combined through-hole technology (THT) components and surface-mount technology (SMT) devices
require wave soldering to solder the THT components. Only a single wave soldering process is encouraged for
boards populated with the modules.
3.3.7
Hand soldering
Hand soldering is not recommended.
3.3.8
Rework
Rework is not recommended.
Never attempt a rework on the module itself, e.g. replacing individual components. Such actions
immediately terminate the warranty.
3.3.9
Conformal coating
®
Certain applications employ a conformal coating of the PCB using HumiSeal or other related coating products.
These materials affect the HF properties of the cellular modules and it is important to prevent them from flowing
into the module.
The RF shields do not provide 100% protection for the module from coating liquids with low viscosity, therefore
care is required in applying the coating.
Conformal Coating of the module will void the warranty.
3.3.10 Casting
If casting is required, use viscose or another type of silicon pottant. The OEM is strongly advised to qualify such
processes in combination with the cellular modules before implementing this in the production.
Casting will void the warranty.
3.3.11 Grounding metal covers
Attempts to improve grounding by soldering ground cables, wick or other forms of metal strips directly onto the
EMI covers is done at the customer's own risk. The numerous ground pins should be sufficient to provide
optimum immunity to interferences and noise.
u-blox gives no warranty for damages to the cellular modules caused by soldering metal cables or any
other forms of metal strips directly onto the EMI covers.
3.3.12 Use of ultrasonic processes
The cellular modules contain components which are sensitive to Ultrasonic Waves. Use of any Ultrasonic
Processes (cleaning, welding etc.) may cause damage to the module.
u-blox gives no warranty against damages to the cellular modules caused by any Ultrasonic Processes.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Handling and soldering
Page 127 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
4 Approvals
For the complete list and specific details regarding the certification schemes approvals, see TOBY-R2 series
Data Sheet [1], or please contact the u-blox office or sales representative nearest you.
4.1
Product certification approval overview
Product certification approval is the process of certifying that a product has passed all tests and criteria required
by specifications, typically called “certification schemes” that can be divided into three distinct categories:


Regulatory certification
o Country specific approval required by local government in most regions and countries, such as:
CE (Conformité Européenne) marking for European Union

FCC (Federal Communications Commission) approval for United States
Industry certification


Telecom industry specific approval verifying the interoperability between devices and networks:

GCF (Global Certification Forum), partnership between European device manufacturers and
network operators to ensure and verify global interoperability between devices and networks

PTCRB (PCS Type Certification Review Board), created by United States network operators to ensure
and verify interoperability between devices and North America networks
Operator certification
Operator specific approval required by some mobile network operator, such as:


AT&T network operator in United States
Verizon Wireless network operator in United States
Even if TOBY-R2 series modules are approved under all major certification schemes, the application device that
integrates TOBY-R2 series modules must be approved under all the certification schemes required by the specific
application device to be deployed in the market.
The required certification scheme approvals and relative testing specifications differ depending on the country or
the region where the device that integrates TOBY-R2 series modules must be deployed, on the relative vertical
market of the device, on type, features and functionalities of the whole application device, and on the network
operators where the device must operate.
Check the appropriate applicability of the TOBY-R2 series module’s approvals while starting the
certification process of the device integrating the module: the re-use of the u-blox cellular module’s
approval can significantly reduce the cost and time to market of the application device certification.
The certification of the application device that integrates a TOBY-R2 series module and the compliance of
the application device with all the applicable certification schemes, directives and standards are the sole
responsibility of the application device manufacturer.
TOBY-R2 series modules are certified according to all capabilities and options stated in the Protocol
Implementation Conformance Statement document (PICS) of the module. The PICS, according to the 3GPP TS
51.010-2 [19], 3GPP TS 34.121-2 [20], 3GPP TS 36.521-2 [22] and 3GPP TS 36.523-2 [23], is a statement of the
implemented and supported capabilities and options of a device.
The PICS document of the application device integrating TOBY-R2 series modules must be updated from
the module PICS statement if any feature stated as supported by the module in its PICS document is not
implemented or disabled in the application device. For more details regarding the AT commands settings
that affect the PICS, see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2].
Check the specific settings required for mobile network operators approvals as they may differ from the
AT commands settings defined in the module as integrated in the application device.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Approvals
Page 128 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
4.2
US Federal Communications Commission notice
United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) IDs:

u-blox TOBY-R200 cellular modules:
XPY1EHM44NN

u-blox TOBY-R201 cellular modules:
XPY1EHQ25NN

u-blox TOBY-R202 cellular modules:
XPY1EHQ24NN
4.2.1
Safety warnings review the structure

Equipment for building-in. The requirements for fire enclosure must be evaluated in the end product

The clearance and creepage current distances required by the end product must be withheld when the
module is installed

The cooling of the end product shall not negatively be influenced by the installation of the module

Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss

No natural rubbers, hygroscopic materials, or materials containing asbestos are employed
4.2.2
Declaration of Conformity
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

this device may not cause harmful interference

this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information: this equipment complies with radiation
exposure limits prescribed for an uncontrolled environment for fixed and mobile use conditions.
This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between
the radiator and the body of the user or nearby persons. This transmitter must not be colocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter except as authorized
in the certification of the product.
The gain of the system antenna(s) used for the TOBY-R2 series modules (i.e. the combined
transmission line, connector, cable losses and radiating element gain) must not exceed 8.5 dBi
(1900 MHz, i.e. UMTS FDD-2 or LTE FDD-2 band), 10.0 dBi (850 MHz, i.e. UMTS FDD-5 or LTE FDD5), 7.9 dBi (1700 MHz, i.e. LTE FDD-4) and 9.7 dBi (700 MHz, i.e. LTE FDD-12) for mobile and fixed
or mobile operating configurations.
4.2.3
Modifications
The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not
expressly approved by u-blox could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Manufacturers of mobile or fixed devices incorporating the TOBY-R2 series modules are
authorized to use the FCC Grants of the TOBY-R2 series modules for their own final products
according to the conditions referenced in the certificates.
The FCC Label shall in the above case be visible from the outside, or the host device shall bear a
second label stating:
"Contains FCC ID: XPY1EHM44NN " resp.
"Contains FCC ID: XPY1EHQ25NN " resp.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Approvals
Page 129 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
"Contains FCC ID: XPY1EHQ24NN " resp.
IMPORTANT: Manufacturers of portable applications incorporating the TOBY-R2 series modules
are required to have their final product certified and apply for their own FCC Grant related to
the specific portable device. This is mandatory to meet the SAR requirements for portable
devices.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Additional Note: as per 47CFR15.105 this equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
o Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
4.3
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver
is connected
Consultant the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help
Industry Canada notice
Industry Canada (IC) Certification Numbers:

u-blox TOBY-R200 cellular modules:
8595A-1EHM44NN

u-blox TOBY-R201 cellular modules:
8595A-1EHQ25NN

u-blox TOBY-R202 cellular modules:
8595A-1EHQ24NN
4.3.1
Declaration of Conformity
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information: this equipment complies with radiation
exposure limits prescribed for an uncontrolled environment for fixed and mobile use conditions.
This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between
the radiator and the body of the user or nearby persons. This transmitter must not be colocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter except as authorized
in the certification of the product.
The gain of the system antenna(s) used for the TOBY-R2 series modules (i.e. the combined
transmission line, connector, cable losses and radiating element gain) must not exceed 9.1 dBi
(1900 MHz, i.e. UMTS FDD-2 or LTE FDD-2 band), 6.7 dBi (850 MHz, i.e. UMTS FDD-5 or LTE FDD5), 9.3 dBi (1700 MHz, i.e. LTE FDD-4) and 6.7 dBi (700 MHz, i.e. LTE FDD-12) for mobile and fixed
or mobile operating configurations.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Approvals
Page 130 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
4.3.2
Modifications
The IC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not
expressly approved by u-blox could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Manufacturers of mobile or fixed devices incorporating the TOBY-R2 series modules are
authorized to use the Industry Canada Certificates of the TOBY-R2 series modules for their own
final products according to the conditions referenced in the certificates.
The IC Label shall in the above case be visible from the outside, or the host device shall bear a
second label stating:
"Contains IC: 8595A-1EHM44NN " resp.
"Contains IC: 8595A-1EHQ25NN " resp.
"Contains IC: 8595A-1EHQ24NN " resp.
Canada, Industry Canada (IC) Notices
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian CAN ICES-3(B) / NMB-3(B) and RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
this device may not cause interference
this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device
Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Information
The radiated output power of the u-blox Cellular Module is below the Industry Canada (IC)
radio frequency exposure limits. The u-blox Cellular Module should be used in such a manner
such that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized.
This device has been evaluated and shown compliant with the IC RF Exposure limits under
mobile exposure conditions (antennas are greater than 20 cm from a person's body).
This device has been certified for use in Canada. Status of the listing in the Industry Canada’s
REL (Radio Equipment List) can be found at the following web address:
http://www.ic.gc.ca/app/sitt/reltel/srch/nwRdSrch.do?lang=eng
Additional Canadian information on RF exposure also can be found at the following web
address: http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf08792.html
IMPORTANT: Manufacturers of portable applications incorporating the TOBY-R2 series modules
are required to have their final product certified and apply for their own Industry Canada
Certificate related to the specific portable device. This is mandatory to meet the SAR
requirements for portable devices.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Canada, avis d'Industrie Canada (IC)
Cet appareil numérique de classe B est conforme aux normes canadiennes CAN ICES-3(B) /
NMB-3(B) et CNR-210.
Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes:
cet appareil ne doit pas causer d'interférence
cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence, notamment les interférences qui peuvent
affecter son fonctionnement
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Approvals
Page 131 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Informations concernant l'exposition aux fréquences radio (RF)
La puissance de sortie émise par l’appareil de sans fil u-blox Cellular Module est inférieure à la
limite d'exposition aux fréquences radio d'Industrie Canada (IC). Utilisez l’appareil de sans fil
u-blox Cellular Module de façon à minimiser les contacts humains lors du fonctionnement
normal.
Ce périphérique a été évalué et démontré conforme aux limites d'exposition aux fréquences
radio (RF) d'IC lorsqu'il est installé dans des produits hôtes particuliers qui fonctionnent dans
des conditions d'exposition à des appareils mobiles (les antennes se situent à plus de 20
centimètres du corps d'une personne).
Ce périphérique est homologué pour l'utilisation au Canada. Pour consulter l'entrée
correspondant à l’appareil dans la liste d'équipement radio (REL - Radio Equipment List)
d'Industrie Canada rendez-vous sur:
http://www.ic.gc.ca/app/sitt/reltel/srch/nwRdSrch.do?lang=fra
Pour des informations supplémentaires concernant l'exposition aux RF au Canada rendez-vous
sur: http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/fra/sf08792.html
IMPORTANT: les fabricants d'applications portables contenant les modules TOBY-R2 series
doivent faire certifier leur produit final et déposer directement leur candidature pour une
certification FCC ainsi que pour un certificat Industrie Canada délivré par l'organisme chargé de
ce type d'appareil portable. Ceci est obligatoire afin d'être en accord avec les exigences SAR
pour les appareils portables.
Tout changement ou modification non expressément approuvé par la partie responsable de la
certification peut annuler le droit d'utiliser l'équipement.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Approvals
Page 132 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
4.4
R&TTED / RED and European Conformance CE mark
The TOBY-R200 modules have been evaluated against the essential requirements of the 1999/5/EC Directive.
In order to satisfy the essential requirements of the 1999/5/EC Directive, the modules are compliant with the
following standards:

Radio Frequency spectrum use (R&TTE art. 3.2):
o EN 301 511
o EN 301 908-1
o EN 301 908-2
o EN 301 908-13

Electromagnetic Compatibility (R&TTE art. 3.1b):
o EN 301 489-1
o EN 301 489-7
o EN 301 489-24

Health and Safety (R&TTE art. 3.1a)
o EN 60950-1:2006 + A11:2009 + A1:2010 + A12:2011 + A2:2013
o EN 62311:2008
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information: this equipment complies with radiation
exposure limits prescribed for an uncontrolled environment for fixed and mobile use conditions.
This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between
the radiator and the body of the user or nearby persons. This transmitter must not be colocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter except as authorized
in the certification of the product.
The conformity assessment procedure for the modules, referred to in Article 10 and detailed in Annex IV of
Directive 1999/5/EC, has been followed with the involvement of the following Notified Body number: 1588
Thus, the following marking is included in the product:
1588
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Approvals
Page 133 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
5 Product testing
5.1
u-blox in-series production test
u-blox focuses on high quality for its products. All units produced are fully tested automatically in production
line. Stringent quality control process has been implemented in the production line. Defective units are analyzed
in detail to improve the production quality.
This is achieved with automatic test equipment (ATE) in production line, which logs all production and
measurement data. A detailed test report for each unit can be generated from the system. Figure 69 illustrates
typical automatic test equipment (ATE) in a production line.
The following typical tests are among the production tests.

Digital self-test (firmware download, Flash firmware verification, IMEI programming)

Measurement of voltages and currents

Adjustment of ADC measurement interfaces

Functional tests (serial interface communication, SIM card communication)

Digital tests (GPIOs and other interfaces)

Measurement and calibration of RF characteristics in all supported bands (such as receiver S/N verification,
frequency tuning of reference clock, calibration of transmitter and receiver power levels, etc.)

Verification of RF characteristics after calibration (i.e. modulation accuracy, power levels, spectrum, etc. are
checked to ensure they are all within tolerances when calibration parameters are applied)
Figure 69: Automatic test equipment for module tests
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Product testing
Page 134 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
5.2
Test parameters for OEM manufacturer
Because of the testing done by u-blox (with 100% coverage), an OEM manufacturer does not need to repeat
firmware tests or measurements of the module RF performance or tests over analog and digital interfaces in their
production test.
However, an OEM manufacturer should focus on:


Module assembly on the device; it should be verified that:
o Soldering and handling process did not damage the module components
All module pins are well soldered on device board
There are no short circuits between pins
Component assembly on the device; it should be verified that:
Communication with host controller can be established
The interfaces between module and device are working
Overall RF performance test of the device including antenna
Dedicated tests can be implemented to check the device. For example, the measurement of module current
consumption when set in a specified status can detect a short circuit if compared with a “Golden Device” result.
In addition, module AT commands can be used to perform functional tests on digital interfaces (communication
with host controller, check SIM interface, GPIOs, etc.), on audio interfaces (audio loop for test purposes can be
enabled by the AT+UPAR=2 command as described in the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]), and to perform RF
performance tests (see the following section 5.2.2 for details).
5.2.1
“Go/No go” tests for integrated devices
A “Go/No go” test is typically to compare the signal quality with a “Golden Device” in a location with excellent
network coverage and known signal quality. This test should be performed after data connection has been
established. AT+CSQ is the typical AT command used to check signal quality in term of RSSI. See the u-blox AT
Commands Manual [2] for detail usage of the AT command.
These kinds of test may be useful as a “go/no go” test but not for RF performance measurements.
This test is suitable to check the functionality of communication with host controller, SIM card as well as power
supply. It is also a means to verify if components at antenna interface are well soldered.
5.2.2
RF functional tests
The overall RF functional test of the device including the antenna can be performed with basic instruments such
as a spectrum analyzer (or an RF power meter) and a signal generator with the assistance of AT+UTEST
command over AT command user interface.
The AT+UTEST command provides a simple interface to set the module to Rx or Tx test modes ignoring the
LTE/3G/2G signaling protocol. The command can set the module into:

transmitting mode in a specified channel and power level in all supported modulation schemes and bands

receiving mode in a specified channel to returns the measured power level in all supported bands
See the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2] and the End user test Application Note [24], for the AT+UTEST
command syntax description and detail guide of usage.
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Product testing
Page 135 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
This feature allows the measurement of the transmitter and receiver power levels to check component assembly
related to the module antenna interface and to check other device interfaces from which depends the RF
performance.
To avoid module damage during transmitter test, a proper antenna according to module
specifications or a 50  termination must be connected to ANT1 port.
To avoid module damage during receiver test the maximum power level received at ANT1 and
ANT2 ports must meet module specifications.
The AT+UTEST command sets the module to emit RF power ignoring LTE/3G/2G signaling protocol. This
emission can generate interference that can be prohibited by law in some countries. The use of this
feature is intended for testing purpose in controlled environments by qualified user and must not be used
during the normal module operation. Follow instructions suggested in u-blox documentation. u-blox
assumes no responsibilities for the inappropriate use of this feature.
Figure 70 illustrates a typical test setup for such RF functional test.
Application
Processor
TOBY-R2 series
Cellular
antenna
Wideband
antenna
IN
Spectrum
Analyzer
or
Power
Meter
OUT
Signal
Generator
AT
commands
ANT1
TX
Application Board
Cellular
antennas
Application
Processor
Wideband
antenna
TOBY-R2 series
AT
commands
ANT1
RX
ANT2
Application Board
Figure 70: Setup with spectrum analyzer or power meter and signal generator for radiated measurements
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Product testing
Page 136 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Appendix
A Migration between TOBY-L2 and TOBY-R2
A.1 Overview
140
28
27
139
50
26
51
138
25
137
52
24
53
23
54
22
55
21
56
57
136
135
134
133
132
131
130
129
128
127
126
125
20
19
58
18
59
124
17
123
TOBY-L2
60
61
Top view
62
63
122
16
15
14
13
121
64
12
65
66
120
119
118
117
116
115
114
113
112
111
110
109
11
10
67
68
69
70
71
108
Pin 93-152: GND
107
72
77
78
GND
RSVD
GND
103
102
101
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89
90
91
92
GND
76
104
GND
100
75
105
RSVD
74
106
GND
GND
ANT1
GND
GND
RSVD
GND
GND
ANT2
GND
GND
73
RSVD
RSVD
USB_D+
RSVD
USB_DRSVD
HOST_SELECT0
I2S_WA
GPIO4
I2S_TXD
GPIO3
I2S_CLK
RESET_N
I2S_RXD
GPIO2
SCL
GPIO1
SDA
PWR_ON
SIM_CLK
RSVD
SIM_IO
RSVD
SIM_RST
RXD
VSIM
TXD
GPIO5
CTS
GPIO6
RTS
HOST_SELECT1
DTR
SDIO_D2
DCD
SDIO_CLK
RI
SDIO_CMD
DSR
SDIO_D0
RSVD
SDIO_D3
RSVD
SDIO_D1
RSVD
GND
RSVD
VCC
V_INT
VCC
VUSB_DET
VCC
V_BCKP
GND
GND
GND
RSVD
ANT_DET
47
151
48
49
144
150
143
149
142
148
141
147
140
32
GND
43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
RSVD
44
GND
45
152
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
GND
46
29
RSVD
GND
GND
RSVD
30
31
30
29
145
146
28
27
139
50
26
51
138
25
137
52
24
53
23
54
22
55
21
56
57
136
135
134
133
132
131
130
129
128
127
126
125
20
19
58
18
59
124
17
123
TOBY-R2
60
61
Top view
62
63
122
16
15
14
13
121
64
12
65
66
120
119
118
117
116
115
114
113
112
111
110
109
11
10
67
68
69
70
71
108
Pin 93-152: GND
107
72
73
74
100
75
76
77
78
106
105
104
103
102
101
99
98
97
96
95
94
79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89
93
90
91
92
GND
141
31
145
146
GND
142
147
RSVD
143
148
GND
GND
ANT1
GND
GND
RSVD
GND
GND
ANT2
GND
GND
144
149
GND
49
150
GND
48
32
43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
151
GND
44
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
45
152
RSVD
47
GND
46
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
I2S_WA
I2S_TXD
I2S_CLK
I2S_RXD
SCL
SDA
SIM_CLK
SIM_IO
SIM_RST
VSIM
GPIO5
GPIO6
HOST_SELECT1
SDIO_D2
SDIO_CLK
SDIO_CMD
SDIO_D0
SDIO_D3
SDIO_D1
GND
VCC
VCC
VCC
GND
GND
ANT_DET
RSVD
GND
TOBY-L2 and TOBY-R2 series cellular modules have exactly the same TOBY form factor (35.6 x 24.8 mm LGA)
with exactly the same 152-pin layout as described in Figure 71, so that the modules can be alternatively
mounted on a single application board using exactly the same copper mask, solder mask and paste mask.
RSVD
USB_D+
USB_DHOST_SELECT0
GPIO4
GPIO3
RESET_N
GPIO2
GPIO1
PWR_ON
RSVD
RSVD
RXD
TXD
CTS
RTS
DTR
DCD
RI
DSR
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
V_INT
VUSB_DET
V_BCKP
GND
RSVD
Figure 71: TOBY-L2 and TOBY-R2 series modules pad layout and pin assignment
TOBY modules are also form-factor compatible with the u-blox LISA, SARA and LARA cellular module families:
although TOBY modules, LISA modules (33.2 x 22.4 mm, 76-pin LCC), SARA modules (26.0 x 16.0 mm, 96-pin
LGA) and LARA modules (26.0 x 24.0 mm, 100-pin LGA) each have different form factors, the footprints for the
TOBY, LISA, SARA and LARA modules have been developed to ensure layout compatibility.
With the u-blox “nested design” solution, any TOBY, LISA, SARA or LARA module can be alternatively mounted
on the same space of a single “nested” application board as described in Figure 72. Guidelines in order to
implement a nested application board, description of the u-blox reference nested design and comparison
between TOBY, LISA, SARA and LARA modules are provided in the Nested Design Application Note [28].
TOBY cellular module
LISA cellular module
LARA cellular module
SARA cellular module
Nested application board
Figure 72: TOBY, LISA, SARA, LARA modules’ layout compatibility: all modules are accommodated on the same nested footprint
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Appendix
Page 137 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Table 51 summarizes the interfaces provided by TOBY-L2 and TOBY-R2 series modules.
DDC (I2C) 1.8 V
●
●
○
○
●
○
○
2,5
●
■
●
●
●
●
●
●
■
●
●
■
1,2
5,8
12 Quad ●
■
●
●
●
●
●
●
■
○
●
■
■
24
1,8
19
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
1,3,5
7,8,28
24
1,2
5,8
12 Quad ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2,4
5,12
1,2
5,8
12 Quad ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
TOBY-R201
2,4,5
12,13
2,5
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
TOBY-R202
2,4
5,12
2,5
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
24
TOBY-L210
1,3,5
7,8,20
24
TOBY-L220
1,3,5
8,19
TOBY-L280
TOBY-R200
12 Quad
LTE bands
● = supported by all product versions
○ = supported by all product versions except version ‘00’
○
○
●
○
○
■
●
■
■
●
■
■
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
□
●
●
●
●
●
□
●
●
□
●
●
●
●
●
□
●
●
□
●
●
●
●
●
□
Analog audio
2,4,5
13,17
2G bands
HSUPA category
3G bands
HSDPA category
TOBY-L201
LTE category
1,2,4
5,8
Wi-Fi control
SDIO 1.8 V
●
Clock output
USB 2.0 High-Speed
●
24
Network indication
UART 1.8 V
●
2,4,5
7,17
GPIOs 1.8 V
SIM detection
●
GPIO
Digital audio
SIM 1.8 V / 3.0 V
○
TOBY-L200
Host select
●
GPRS/EDGE class
RESET_N
Audio
PWR_ON
Serial
V_INT 1.8 V supply out
SIM
V_BCKP
System
VCC module supply in
Power
Antenna Detection
RF / Radio Access Technology
MIMO 2x2 / Rx diversity
Module
■
■ = supported by all product versions except versions ‘00’,’01’,’60’
□ = supported by all product versions except versions ‘02’
Table 51: Summary of TOBY-L2 series and TOBY-R2 series modules interfaces
Figure 73 summarizes the LTE, 3G and 2G operating frequency bands of TOBY-L2 and TOBY-R2 series modules.
17
17
850
TOBY-L200
700
750
800
VIII
850
900
850
900
VIII
950
960
TOBY-L201
17
13
700
13
750
800
20
850
TOBY-L210
700
750
800
900
TOBY-L220
700
750
VIII
850
900
850
950
900
28
850
TOBY-L280
700
750
800
950
VIII
VIII
900
VIII
850
900
850
900
703
12
850
TOBY-R200
700
750
800
VIII
850
900
850
TOBY-R201
13
700
750
13
800
12
TOBY-R202
700
750
800
699
850
2000
2050
2100
II
2150
2200
1900
1950
2500
2550
2600
2650
2500
2700
2690
2000
2050
2100
2150
2200
2500
2550
2600
2650
2700
2155
1800
1800
1750
1800
II
1900
1850
1900
II
1900
1950
2000
2050
2100
2150
1710
2200
2170
1700
1750
1800
2500
2550
2600
2650
2500
2700
2690
900
900
1800
1700
1750
1800
1800
1700
1750
1800
2050
2100
2150
II
1900
1700
1950
1800
II
1900
1850
1900
2000
2050
2100
1700
1710
2500
2550
2600
2150
II
1900
2650
2700
2200
1950
2000
2050
2100
2500
2550
2600
2650
2500
2700
2690
2150
2200
2500
2550
2600
2650
2700
2200
2500
2550
2600
2650
2700
2200
2500
2550
2600
2650
2700
2170
1750
II
1800
1850
II
1900
1950
2000
2050
2100
2150
1710
950
2200
1710
2155
894
2000
2170
1800
900
1900
VIII
950
II
1900
1850
900
1950
1710
900
950
1900
2170
950
1850
1710
894
12
1700
850
699
1850
VIII
960
12
1800
699
12
1750
950
960
12
1950
II
VIII
960
850
1700
900
824
28
1900
19
1850
1710
960
800
1800
1800
IV
2170
791
19
1750
II
1900
1710
894
20
1800
1700
850
704
II
1900
900
704
17
IV
1750
II
1800
1850
II
1900
1950
2000
2050
2100
2150
2155
LEGENDA
= LTE bands
= 3G bands
= 2G bands
Figure 73: Summary of TOBY-L2 and TOBY-R2 series modules LTE, 3G and 2G operating frequency bands
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Appendix
Page 138 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
A.2 Pin-out comparison between TOBY-L2 and TOBY-R2
TOBY-L2
TOBY-R2
Pin No
Pin Name
Description
Pin Name
Description
RSVD
Reserved
RSVD
Reserved
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
V_BCKP
RTC Supply Input/Output
3.0 V output
1.4 V – 4.2 V input (RTC backup)
V_BCKP
RTC Supply Input/Output
1.8 V output
1.0 V – 1.9 V input (RTC backup)
Voltage values slightly different,
but with no functional difference
VUSB_DET
Not supported
VUSB_DET
VBUS USB supply (5 V) detection
5 V must be applied at VUSB_DET
input of TOBY-R2 to enable USB.
The pin must be left unconnected
on TOBY-L2, as it is not supported.
V_INT
Interfaces Supply Output
1.8 V output
V_INT
Interfaces Supply Output
1.8 V output
RSVD
Reserved
This pin must be connected to GND
RSVD
Reserved
This pin must be connected to GND
7-9
RSVD
Reserved
RSVD
Reserved
10
DSR
UART DSR Output18 / GPIO19
DSR
UART DSR Output
Further GPIO function on TOBY-L2
11
RI
UART RI Output / GPIO
RI
UART RI Output
Further GPIO function on TOBY-L2
12
DCD
UART DCD Output18 / GPIO19
DCD
UART DCD Output
Further GPIO function on TOBY-L2
13
DTR
UART DTR Input18 / GPIO19
DTR
UART DTR Input
Further GPIO function on TOBY-L2
14
RTS
UART RTS Input18
RTS
UART RTS Input
15
CTS
UART CTS Output18
CTS
UART CTS Output
16
TXD
UART Data Input18
TXD
UART Data Input
17
RXD
UART Data Output18
RXD
UART Data Output
18
RSVD
Reserved
RSVD
Reserved
Test-Point recommended for TOBY-R2
19
RSVD
Reserved
RSVD
Reserved
Test-Point recommended for TOBY-R2
20
PWR_ON
Power-on Input
Internal 50k pull-up to VCC
PWR_ON
Power-on Input
Internal 10k pull-up to V_BCKP
Internal pull-up slightly different,
but with no functional difference
21
GPIO1
GPIO19
WWAN status indication on ”00”,
“01” and “60” product versions
GPIO1
GPIO
22
GPIO2
GPIO19
GPIO2
GPIO
23
RESET_N
Reset signal Input
Internal 50k pull-up to VCC
Reset, Switch-on, Switch-off
RESET_N
Reset signal Input
Internal 10k pull-up to V_BCKP
Reset, Switch-on
24
GPIO3
GPIO19
GPIO3
GPIO
25
GPIO4
GPIO19
GPIO4
GPIO
26
HOST_SELECT0
Not supported
HOST_SELECT0
Not supported
27
USB_D-
USB Data I/O (D-)
USB_D-
USB Data I/O (D-)
28
USB_D+
USB Data I/O (D+)
USB_D+
USB Data I/O (D+)
29
RSVD
Reserved
RSVD
Reserved
30
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
31
RSVD
Reserved
RSVD
Reserved
32
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
33-43
RSVD
Reserved
RSVD
Reserved
44
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
45
RSVD
Reserved
RSVD
Reserved
46
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
47-49
RSVD
Reserved
RSVD
Reserved
50
I2S_WA
I2S Word Alignment18 / GPIO19
I2S_WA
I2S Word Alignment / GPIO
51
I2S_TXD
I2S Data Output18 / GPIO19
I2S_TXD
I2S Data Output / GPIO
I2S_CLK
I2S Clock / GPIO
I2S_RXD
I2S Data Input / GPIO
52
53
18
19
I2S_CLK
I2S_RXD
18
18
I S Clock / GPIO
18
19
19
I S Data Input / GPIO
19
Remarks for migration
Internal pull-up slightly different.
Function slightly different.
Not supported by “00” product versions
Not supported by “00”, “01”, “60” product versions
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Appendix
Page 139 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
TOBY-L2
TOBY-R2
Pin No
Pin Name
Description
54
SCL
I C Clock Output
Pin Name
Description
SCL
I C Clock Output
55
SDA
I C Data I/O
SDA
I C Data I/O
56
SIM_CLK
57
SIM_IO
SIM Clock Output
SIM_CLK
SIM Clock Output
SIM Data I/O
SIM_IO
58
SIM Data I/O
SIM_RST
SIM Reset Output
SIM_RST
SIM Reset Output
59
VSIM
SIM Supply Output
VSIM
SIM Supply Output
60
GPIO5
GPIO
SIM detection
20
GPIO5
GPIO
SIM detection
61
GPIO6
GPIO20
GPIO6
GPIO
62
HOST_SELECT1
Not supported
HOST_SELECT1
Not supported
63
SDIO_D2
SDIO serial data [2]
SDIO_D2
SDIO serial data [2]
20
20
64
SDIO_CLK
SDIO serial clock
65
SDIO_CMD
SDIO command
66
SDIO_D0
67
20
20
Remarks for migration
21
21
SDIO_CLK
SDIO serial clock
SDIO_CMD
SDIO command
SDIO serial data [0]20
SDIO_D0
SDIO serial data [0]21
SDIO_D3
SDIO serial data [3]20
SDIO_D3
SDIO serial data [3]21
68
SDIO_D1
SDIO serial data [1]
20
SDIO_D1
SDIO serial data [1]21
69
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
70-72
VCC
Module Supply Input
3.40 V – 4.35 V normal range
3.20 V – 4.35 V extended range
VCC
Module Supply Input
3.30 V – 4.40 V normal range
3.00 V – 4.50 V extended range
73-74
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
75
ANT_DET
Antenna Detection Input20
ANT_DET
Antenna Detection Input
76
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
77
RSVD
Reserved
RSVD
Reserved
78-80
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
81
ANT1
RF Antenna Input/Output
Up to six LTE bands
Up to five 3G bands
Up to four 2G bands
ANT1
RF Antenna Input/Output
Up to five LTE bands
Up to four 3G bands
Up to four 2G bands
82-83
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
84
RSVD
Reserved
RSVD
Reserved
85-86
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
87
ANT2
RF Antenna Input
ANT2
RF Antenna Input
88-90
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
91
RSVD
Reserved
RSVD
Reserved
92-152
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
20
21
Larger operating ranges on TOBY-R2.
VCC BB / PA split on TOBY-R200
No RF functional difference
Different operating bands support
No RF functional difference
Different operating bands support
Table 52: TOBY-L2 and TOBY-R2 series modules pin assignment with remarks for migration
For further details regarding the characteristics, capabilities, usage or settings applicable for each interface
of the cellular modules, see the TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet [1], the TOBY-L2 series Data Sheet [26], the
TOBY-L2 / MPCI-L2 series System Integration Manual [27], the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2] and the
Nested Design Application Note [28].
20
21
Not supported by “00”, “01”, “60” product versions
Not supported by “02” product versions
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Appendix
Page 140 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
A.3 Schematic for TOBY-L2 and TOBY-R2 integration
Figure 74 shows an example schematic diagram where a TOBY-L2 series module or a TOBY-R2 series module
(“00”, “01”, “02”, “60”, or “62” product versions) can be integrated into the same application board, using all
the available interfaces and functions of the module. The different mounting options for the external parts are
highlighted in different colors as described in the legend, according to the interfaces supported by the different
module product versions.
TOBY-L2 series (’00’, ‘01’, ’02’, ‘60’, ‘62’ versions)
TOBY-R2 series (’02’ product versions)
0Ω for
33pF
3V8
330uF
100nF
10nF
68pF
15pF
Mount for modules
supporting 2G
70
VCC
71
VCC
72
VCC
8.2pF
GND
81
ANT2
87
ANT_DET
75
82nH
V_BCKP
10k
27pF
Application
Processor
TP
Open
Drain
Output
20
23
PWR_ON
RESET_N
ESD
V_INT
GND
Open
Drain
Output
SIM Card Holder
1k
TP
V_INT
GPIO5
60
SW2
VSIM
59
CCVCC (C1)
SIM_IO
57
CCIO (C7)
SIM_CLK
56
CCCLK (C3)
SIM_RST
58
CCRST (C2)
SW1
CCVPP (C6)
470k 47pF 47pF 47pF 47pF 100nF
0Ω
VBUS
DD+
TP
0Ω
TP
0Ω
TP
VUSB_DET
27
USB_D-
28
USB_D+
GND (C5)
ESD ESD ESD ESD ESD ESD
Audio Codec
MAX9860
V_INT
USB 2.0 Host
Secondary
Cellular
Antenna
Connector
33pF
100uF
TP
Primary
Cellular
Antenna
Connector
82nH
Mount for modules
supporting LTE Band-7
RTC
back-up
ANT1
TOBY-L2xx-00
TOBY-L2xx-01
TOBY-L2xx-60
10k
V_INT
VDD
IRQn
MICBIAS
4.7k
SDA
55
SCL
54
SCL
SDA
100nF
1µF
1µF
10µF
2.2k
4.7k
GND
GND
1.8 V DTE
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DTR
DSR
RI
DCD
0Ω
TP
0Ω
TP
0Ω
TP
0Ω
TP
0Ω
TP
0Ω
TP
0Ω
TP
0Ω
TP
16
TXD
17
RXD
14
RTS
15
CTS
13
DTR
10
DSR
11
RI
12
DCD
MICLP
I2S_TXD
51
SDIN
I2S_RXD
53
SDOUT
I2S_CLK
52
BCLK
MICLN
GPIO6
50
LRCLK
61
MCLK
2.2k
10nF 10nF
OUTP
OUTN
IN
26
HOST_SELECT0
62
HOST_SELECT1
OUT
LDO Regulator
IN
3V8
66
68
SDIO_D2
22
Network
Indicator
24
25
GPIO2
GPIO3
GPIO4
SDIO_D3
SDIO_CMD
65
GPIO1
22Ω
22Ω
22Ω
67
64
21
22Ω
22Ω
TP
18
RSVD
19
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
VIO
1V8
WWAN
Indicator
15
SD_D0
16
SD_D1
11
SD_D2
12
SD_D3
14
SD_CLK
13
SD_CMD
PDn
10
RESETn
19
SLEEP_CLK
20
CFG
47k
GND
BPF
ANT2
Wi-Fi enable
3V8
TP
3V3
ANT1
22Ω
63
SDIO_CLK
1V8
OUT
SHDNn GND
SDIO_D1
27pF 27pF ESD ESD
SHDNn GND
470k
3V8
SDIO_D0
SPK
ELLA-W131
Wi-Fi Module
LDO Regulator 3V3
3V8
ESD ESD
EMI
10nF 10nF
V_INT
27pF 27pF
EMI
GND
GND
EMI
1µF
MICGND
I2S_WA
MIC
EMI
1µF
GND
Wi-Fi
Antenna
29
LEGEND
26
TOBY-L2xx-xx
TOBY-R2xx-xx
Mount for TOBY-R2xx-xx
TOBY-L2xx-00
Mount for TOBY-L2xx-01
TOBY-L2xx-60
Mount for TOBY-L2xx-x2
TOBY-L2xx-01
TOBY-L2xx-x2
Mount for
TOBY-L2xx-60
TOBY-R2xx-xx
TOBY-L2xx-x2
Mount for
TOBY-R2xx-xx
Mount for
Figure 74: Example of complete schematic diagram to integrate TOBY-L2 modules and TOBY-R2 modules (“00”, “01”, “02”, “60”,
or “62” product versions) on the same application board, using all the available interfaces / functions of the modules
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Appendix
Page 141 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
B Glossary
3GPP
3rd Generation Partnership Project
8-PSK
8 Phase-Shift Keying modulation
16QAM
16-state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
64QAM
64-state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
ACM
Abstract Control Model
ADC
Analog to Digital Converter
AP
Application Processor
ASIC
Application-Specific Integrated Circuit
AT
AT Command Interpreter Software Subsystem, or attention
BAW
Bulk Acoustic Wave
CSFB
Circuit Switched Fall-Back
DC
Direct Current
DCE
Data Communication Equipment
DDC
Display Data Channel interface
DL
Down-Link (Reception)
DRX
Discontinuous Reception
DSP
Digital Signal Processing
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
ECM
Ethernet networking Control Model
EDGE
Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution
EMC
Electro-Magnetic Compatibility
EMI
Electro-Magnetic Interference
ESD
Electro-Static Discharge
ESR
Equivalent Series Resistance
E-UTRA
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access
FDD
Frequency Division Duplex
FEM
Front End Module
FOAT
Firmware Over AT commands
FOTA
Firmware Over The Air
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
FW
Firmware
GND
Ground
GNSS
Global Navigation Satellite System
GPIO
General Purpose Input Output
GPRS
General Packet Radio Service
GPS
Global Positioning System
HBM
Human Body Model
HSIC
High Speed Inter Chip
HSDPA
High Speed Downlink Packet Access
HSUPA
High Speed Uplink Packet Access
HTTP
HyperText Transfer Protocol
HW
Hardware
I/Q
In phase and Quadrature
I2C
Inter-Integrated Circuit interface
I2S
Inter IC Sound interface
IP
Internet Protocol
LDO
Low-Dropout
LGA
Land Grid Array
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Appendix
Page 142 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
LNA
Low Noise Amplifier
LPDDR
Low Power Double Data Rate synchronous dynamic RAM memory
LTE
Long Term Evolution
M2M
Machine-to-Machine
MBIM
Mobile Broadband Interface Model
MIMO
Multi-Input Multi-Output
N/A
Not Applicable
N.A.
Not Available
NCM
Network Control Model
OEM
Original Equipment Manufacturer device: an application device integrating a u-blox cellular module
OTA
Over The Air
PA
Power Amplifier
PCM
Pulse Code Modulation
PCN / IN
Product Change Notification / Information Note
PCS
Personal Communications Service
PFM
Pulse Frequency Modulation
PMU
Power Management Unit
PWM
Pulse Width Modulation
QPSK
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
RF
Radio Frequency
RMII
Reduced Media Independent Interface
RNDIS
Remote Network Driver Interface Specification
RSE
Radiated Spurious Emission
RTC
Real Time Clock
SAW
Surface Acoustic Wave
SDIO
Secure Digital Input Output
SIM
Subscriber Identification Module
SMS
Short Message Service
SRF
Self Resonant Frequency
SSL
Secure Socket Layer
TBD
To Be Defined
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol
TDD
Time Division Duplex
TDMA
Time Division Multiple Access
TIS
Total Isotropic Sensitivity
TP
Test-Point
TRP
Total Radiated Power
UART
Universal Asynchronous Receiver-Transmitter
UDP
User Datagram Protocol
UICC
Universal Integrated Circuit Card
UL
Up-Link (Transmission)
UMTS
Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
USB
Universal Serial Bus
VCO
Voltage Controlled Oscillator
VoLTE
Voice over LTE
VSWR
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
Wi-Fi
Wireless Local Area Network (IEEE 802.11 short range radio technology)
WLAN
Wireless Local Area Network (IEEE 802.11 short range radio technology)
WWAN
Wireless Wide Area Network (GSM / UMTS / LTE cellular radio technology)
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Appendix
Page 143 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Related documents
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
u-blox TOBY-R2 series Data Sheet, Docu No UBX-16005785
u-blox AT Commands Manual, Docu No UBX-13002752
u-blox EVK-R2xx User Guide, Docu No UBX-16016088
u-blox Windows Embedded OS USB Driver Installation Application Note, Docu No UBX-14003263
u-blox Firmware Update Application Note, Docu No UBX-13001845
Universal Serial Bus Revision 2.0 specification, http://www.usb.org/developers/docs/usb20_docs/
ITU-T Recommendation V.24 - 02-2000 - List of definitions for interchange circuits between Data
Terminal Equipment (DTE) and Data Circuit-terminating Equipment (DCE), http://www.itu.int/rec/TREC-V.24-200002-I/en
3GPP TS 27.007 - AT command set for User Equipment (UE)
3GPP TS 27.005 - Use of Data Terminal Equipment - Data Circuit terminating; Equipment (DTE - DCE)
interface for Short Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS)
3GPP TS 27.010 - Terminal Equipment to User Equipment (TE-UE) multiplexer protocol
u-blox Mux Implementation Application Note, Docu No UBX-13001887
I C-bus specification and user manual - Rev. 5 - 9 October 2012 - NXP Semiconductors,
http://www.nxp.com/documents/user_manual/UM10204.pdf
u-blox GNSS Implementation Application Note, Docu No UBX-13001849
GSM Association TS.09 - Battery Life Measurement and Current Consumption Technique
http://www.gsma.com/newsroom/wp-content/uploads/2013/09/TS.09-v7.6.pdf
CENELEC EN 61000-4-2 (2001): "Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 4-2: Testing and
measurement techniques – Electrostatic discharge immunity test".
ETSI EN 301 489-1 V1.8.1: “Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); EMC
standard for radio equipment and services; Part 1: Common technical requirements”
ETSI EN 301 489-7 V1.3.1 “Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); EMC
standard for radio equipment and services; Part 7: Specific conditions for mobile and portable radio
and ancillary equipment of digital cellular radio telecommunications systems“
ETSI EN 301 489-24 V1.4.1 "Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); EMC
standard for radio equipment and services; Part 24: Specific conditions for IMT-2000 CDMA Direct
Spread (UTRA) for Mobile and portable (UE) radio and ancillary equipment"
3GPP TS 51.010-2 - Technical Specification Group GSM/EDGE Radio Access Network; Mobile Station
(MS) conformance specification; Part 2: Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS)
3GPP TS 34.121-2 - Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; User Equipment (UE)
conformance specification; Radio transmission and reception (FDD); Part 2: Implementation
Conformance Statement (ICS)
3GPP TS 36.521-1 - Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access; User Equipment conformance
specification; Radio transmission and reception; Part 1: Conformance Testing
3GPP TS 36.521-2 - Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User Equipment conformance
specification; Radio transmission and reception; Part 2: Implementation Conformance Statement (ICS)
3GPP TS 36.523-2 - Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Packet Core (EPC);
User Equipment conformance specification; Part 2: Implementation Conformance Statement (ICS)
u-blox End user test Application Note, Docu No UBX-13001922
u-blox Package Information Guide, Docu No UBX-14001652
u-blox TOBY-L2 series Data Sheet, Docu No UBX-13004573
u-blox TOBY-L2 / MPCI-L2 series System Integration Manual, Docu No UBX- 13004618
u-blox Nested Design Application Note, Docu No UBX-16007243
Some of the above documents can be downloaded from u-blox web-site (http://www.u-blox.com/).
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Related documents
Page 144 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Revision history
Revision
Date
Name
Status / Comments
R01
08-Jul-2016
sses
Initial release for TOBY-R2 series modules
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Revision history
Page 145 of 146
TOBY-R2 series - System Integration Manual
Contact
For complete contact information visit us at http://www.u-blox.com/
u-blox Offices
North, Central and South America
u-blox America, Inc.
Phone:
+1 703 483 3180
E-mail:
info_us@u-blox.com
Regional Office West Coast:
Phone:
+1 408 573 3640
E-mail:
info_us@u-blox.com
Headquarters
Europe, Middle East, Africa
u-blox AG
Phone:
+41 44 722 74 44
E-mail:
info@u-blox.com
Support: support@u-blox.com
Technical Support:
Phone:
+1 703 483 3185
E-mail:
support_us@u-blox.com
Asia, Australia, Pacific
u-blox Singapore Pte. Ltd.
Phone:
+65 6734 3811
E-mail:
info_ap@u-blox.com
Support: support_ap@u-blox.com
Regional Office Australia:
Phone:
+61 2 8448 2016
E-mail:
info_anz@u-blox.com
Support: support_ap@u-blox.com
Regional Office China (Beijing):
Phone:
+86 10 68 133 545
E-mail:
info_cn@u-blox.com
Support: support_cn@u-blox.com
Regional Office China (Chongqing):
Phone:
+86 23 6815 1588
E-mail:
info_cn@u-blox.com
Support: support_cn@u-blox.com
Regional Office China (Shanghai):
Phone:
+86 21 6090 4832
E-mail:
info_cn@u-blox.com
Support: support_cn@u-blox.com
Regional Office China (Shenzhen):
Phone:
+86 755 8627 1083
E-mail:
info_cn@u-blox.com
Support: support_cn@u-blox.com
Regional Office India:
Phone:
+91 80 4050 9200
E-mail:
info_in@u-blox.com
Support: support_in@u-blox.com
Regional Office Japan (Osaka):
Phone:
+81 6 6941 3660
E-mail:
info_jp@u-blox.com
Support: support_jp@u-blox.com
Regional Office Japan (Tokyo):
Phone:
+81 3 5775 3850
E-mail:
info_jp@u-blox.com
Support: support_jp@u-blox.com
Regional Office Korea:
Phone:
+82 2 542 0861
E-mail:
info_kr@u-blox.com
Support: support_kr@u-blox.com
Regional Office Taiwan:
Phone:
+886 2 2657 1090
E-mail:
info_tw@u-blox.com
Support: support_tw@u-blox.com
UBX-16010572 - R01
Objective Specification
Contact
Page 146 of 146
Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 146
Language                        : it-IT
Tagged PDF                      : Yes
Title                           : TOBY-L2 series
Author                          : u-blox AG
Subject                         : System Integration Manual
Creator                         : Microsoft® Office Word 2007
Create Date                     : 2016:09:06 08:30:54+02:00
Modify Date                     : 2016:09:06 08:30:54+02:00
Producer                        : Microsoft® Office Word 2007
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools
FCC ID Filing: XPY1EHQ24NN

Navigation menu